Contents

Seat Arona 2021 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 340
1 of 340

Summary of Content for Seat Arona 2021 Owner’s Manual PDF

Arona Owners manual

6F 90

12 72

0B Q

In gl

s 6

F9 01

27 20

BQ (

11 .2

1)

SE A

T A

ro na

I ng

l s

(11 .2

1)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.21

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man- ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving.

Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING Read and always observe safety infor- mation concerning the passenger's front airbag page 30, Fitting and us- ing child seats.

About this manual This instruction manual is valid for all variants and versions of your SEAT model. It describes all equipment and models without specifying whether they are optional equipment or model variants. As a result, equipment not fit- ted to your vehicle or only available in certain countries may be described. Find out about your vehicle's equipment in the documenta- tion supplied with it and please contact your SEAT Official SEAT Service if you require more detailed information.

All information provided in instruction manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press. As the vehicle is under continuous development, it may have differences to the data included in this man- ual. For this reason, no claims can be made in the event of mismatching data, illustrations and descriptions.

Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times if you sell it or lend it to third parties. In addition, SEAT rec- ommends resetting the infotainment system to factory settings to delete all personal data.

Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, backwards) in this manual refer to the travel

direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- ted.

This instruction manual has been written for left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive vehicles, the arrangement of the controls dif- fers partly from that shown in the illustrations or described in the texts.

Technical modifications to the vehicle or safety-critical issues that have arisen since the time of going to press will be included in a supplement to the on-board documentation.

Trademarks are marked with . The ab- sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. It indicates that the section continues on the next page.

You can access the information in this manual using:

Thematic table of contents that follows the manuals general chapter structure. Visual table of contents that uses graphics to indicate the pages containing essential information, which is detailed in the corre- sponding chapters. Alphabetical index with many terms and synonyms to help you find information.

WARNING Texts after this symbol contain informa- tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.

CAUTION Texts after this symbol indicate possible damage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts after this symbol contain informa- tion about the protection of the environ- ment.

Note Texts after this symbol contain addition- al information.

Digital instruction manual The digital version of the manual can be found on SEAT's official website:

Fig. 1 SEAT website

scan the QR code Fig. 1 OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicle.

Related videos The operation of some of the vehicle's fea- tures can be shown as an instruction video:

Fig. 2 SEAT website

scan the QR code Fig. 2 OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then Multimedia.

Note Video instructions are only available in certain languages.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents General views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Correct sitting position of vehicle occu- pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 16 How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 19 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Information, assistance and emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 47

Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 128 Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Infotainment operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

5

Table of Contents

SEAT Drive Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Drive assist sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . 210 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Side Assist with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Stabilisation and brake assistance sys- tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 240 Assisted parking system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . 240 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring (ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Parking System Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . 254 Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Engine management and emissions control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 298 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Accessories and modifications to the ve- hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 306

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 309 Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Radioelectrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Indications about the technical data . . . . 316 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Driving assistance sensors page 209 Front radar Parking aid sensors Park assist sensor Front multifunction camera

1

2

3

4

Levels control Oil page 279 Brake fluid page 284 Battery page 285 Bonnet Unlocking lever page 277 Open/close page 277

Towing the vehicle Towline anchorage page 53

A

B

C

Tow-start page 51

7

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Driving assistance sensors page 209 Rear view camera Parking aid sensors Rear radars Park assist sensor

1

2

3

4

Rear lid Opening from outside page 108 Emergency opening page 108 Towing the vehicle Towline anchorage page 53 Tow-start page 51 Opening and closing Doors page 105 Central locking page 96 Emergency lock page 106

A

B

C

Fuel tank Fuel capacity page 316 Open/Close cap page 270 Action in the event of a puncture Anti-puncture kit page 40 Wheel change page 43

D

E

8

General views of the vehicle

Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows page 109 Exterior mirror adjustment page 122 Open bonnet lever page 277 Headlight switch page 111 Turn signal and main beam lever page 113 Cruise control page 212 Warning lamps page 86 Wipers and rear window wiper page 120

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Driver information system page 84 Hazard warning lights page 117 Infotainment system page 88, page 143 Fuses page 55 Steering wheel adjustment page 15 Ignition lock page 189 Air conditioning page 137 Starter button page 189 Central locking page 96

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Front passenger airbag disconnection display page 25

16

9

General views of the vehicle

Overview (right hand drive)

Open bonnet lever page 277 Hazard warning lights page 117 Infotainment system page 88 Turn signal and main beam lever page 113 Cruise control page 212 Warning lamps page 86 Wipers and rear window wiper page 120 Driver information system page 84

1

2

3

4

5

6

Headlight switch page 111 Exterior mirror adjustment page 122 Electric windows page 109 Air conditioning page 137 Central locking page 96 Start button page 189 Front passenger airbag disconnection display page 25 Steering wheel adjustment page 15 Ignition lock page 189

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Fuses page 5516

10

General views of the vehicle

Interior view

Isofix anchors page 31 Headrest adjustment page 125 Seat belts page 16 Interior mirror page 122 Disconnecting the front passenger front airbag page 25 Handbrake page 236 Seat adjustment page 124

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

11

Safety

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING This manual contains important informa- tion about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documenta- tion also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers. Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- pecially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Before driving

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.

Make sure all luggage is secured page 128.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors properly according to your size.

Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the headrests in the in-use po- sition page 125.

Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests according to their height.

Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts page 28.

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position page 13.

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly page 16.

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.

Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone calls.

Never drive when your driving ability is im- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics may result in severe accidents and even loss of life. Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics may significantly alter perception, affect reaction times and safety while driving, which could result in the loss of control of the vehicle.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- dent, the safety equipment may reduce the

12

Safe driving

risk of injury. The following points cover part of the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

three-point seat belts, belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats, belt tensioners for the front and rear side seats, front airbags, side airbags in the front seat backrests, head-protection airbags, ISOFIX anchor points for child seats on the rear side seats with the ISOFIX system, height-adjustable front headrests, rear headrests with in-use position and non-use position, adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your pas- sengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 3 The correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10 inches).

Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct sitting position, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices. The seat belt and airbag can only provide optimum protection if a cor- rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom- mends taking your car in for technical serv- ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the following positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants: Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the headrest Fig. 4. Short people must lower the headrest com- pletely, even if your head is below its upper edge. Tall people must raise the headrest com- pletely. Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

1) Depending on the version/market. 13

Safety

Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly page 19.

The following also applies to the driver: Move the seat backrest to an almost up- right position so that your back rests com- pletely against it. Move the steering wheel so it is at least 25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands on both sides, on the outer part, with your arms slightly bent. The steering wheel must always point to- wards the chest and never towards the face. Move the seat in such a way that you can step on the pedals with your knees slightly bent and with a distance between the knees and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in- ches) Fig. 3. Adjust the height of the seat so that you can reach the top of the steering wheel. Always keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

For the passenger, the following applies: Move the seat backrest to an almost up- right position so that your back rests com- pletely against it. Move the seat as far back as possible (mini- mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-

board check translation). If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety belt.

WARNING Sitting in an incorrect position may in- crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in the event of sudden braking or manoeu- vring, in case of collision or accident and if the airbags deploy. Before starting the car, all passengers must be sitting in a correct position and stay like that for the entire journey. This al- so applies to a correct use of the seat belt. The maximum amount of people in the vehicle is the same as the amount of seats with seat belts. For children, always use a certified pro- tection system, certified and suited for their weight and height page 28. While driving, always keep your feet in the footwell. Never place them over the seat or the dashboard, for example, or out- side the window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt may offer insufficient protection

and also increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi- tion

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases. Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the pro- tective function of seat belts and, therefore, increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju- ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe- cially heightened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver is re- sponsible for all people, particularly children, inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of incor- rect sitting positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion: Never stand in the vehicle. Never stand on the seats. Never kneel on the seats. Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the rear. Never lean against the dash panel.

14

Safe driving

Never lie on the rear seats. Never sit on the front edge of a seat. Never sit sideways. Never lean out of a window. Never put your feet out of a window. Never put your feet on the dash panel. Never place your feet on the bench or on the backrest of the seat. Never travel in a footwell. Never sit on the armrests. Never travel without wearing the seat belt. Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Sitting in an incorrect position increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres. All occupants must sit correctly during the journey and wear the seat belt correct- ly. Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit- ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or are not at a proper distance of the airbag risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries, especially if the airbags deploy and strike them.

Steering wheel position adjust- ment

Fig. 5 Lever in the lower left side of the steering column.

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is stationary.

Pull the Fig. 5 1 lever down, move the steering wheel to the desired position and lift the lever back up until it locks.

WARNING Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust- ment function and an incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury. After adjusting the steering column, push the lever Fig. 5 1 firmly upwards to en- sure the steering wheel does not acciden- tally change position while driving.

Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, stop safely and make the proper adjustment. The adjusted steering wheel should be facing your chest and not your face so as not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro- tection in the event of an accident. When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce injuries when the driver's front airbag deploys. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and head.

Pedal area

Pedals

Ensure that you can always press the ac- celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim- paired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unim- paired to their initial positions.

15

Safety

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership. Fasteners for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.

WARNING Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving. Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could ob- struct the pedals. Risk of accident. Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores of seat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp lights up to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off. Protect children by using a child seat ac- cording to the child's height and weight page 28.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened while driving, a warning sound will be heard for a few seconds. The warning light will also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened with the ignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display

Fig. 6 Instrument panel: left rear seat occu- pied and corresponding seat belt fastened dis- play.

Depending on the model version, when the ignition is switched on, the seat belt status display Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in- forms the driver whether the passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

It indicates that the corresponding seat is empty. Indicates that the seat is occupied and the occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 60 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehi- cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt

16

Seat belts

status is displayed for approximately 30 sec- onds.

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the proper position. They also help prevent uncontrolled movements that may result in serious injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-

gy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival when in- volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- tion provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air- bags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on collision. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- sions, overturns or accidents in which the air- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.

Important safety instructions for the use of seat belts

Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.

Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.

WARNING If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly. Never allow two passengers (even chil- dren) to share the same seat belt. Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries. Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position. Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- ducing their capacity to protect. The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from en- gaging securely. Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing. Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of

17

Safety

the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and have been stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- newal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked. Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- moved or modified in any way. The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics

Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the case of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en- ergy called kinetic energy starts acting on both the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher they are, the more energy there is to be ab- sorbed in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle in our example do not have their seat belts fas- tened, in the event of a collision the entire

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- screen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 8.

It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could other- wise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- danger not only themselves but also the front occupants Fig. 9.

18

Seat belts

How to properly adjust your seat belt

Fastening and unfastening the seat belt

Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle.

Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- cupants in the position that most protects them in the event of an accident or sudden braking .

Fastening the seat belt Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly page 13. Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in an upright position . Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so . Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the corresponding seat Fig. 10. Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat belt Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle has come to a standstill .

Press the red button on the buckle Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from the buckle. Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- tion unless the seat backrest is in an up- right position and the seat belt is worn cor- rectly, according to your size. Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sud- den braking. The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, can cause severe injuries if the belt moves from hard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. the stomach).

19

Safety

Correct seat belt position

Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and headrest posi- tions, viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection in the event of an accident and reduce the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat

belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op- timum position to ensure the airbag provides the maximum protection. The seat belt must therefore always be worn and the webbing correctly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even fatal injuries page 13, Correct sit- ting position of vehicle occupants.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the shoulder. The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt must lie evenly across the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach and must be worn properly at all times during the pregnancy Fig. 13.

Adapting the position of the belt webbing to your size The position of the seat belt can be adapted by adjusting the height of the front seats.

WARNING An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort- ably on the torso The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stom- ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com- fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack. For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis and always lie flat, surrounding the stomach Fig. 13. Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas- tened. Once the seat belt is positioned correct- ly, don't pull it away from your body with your hand. Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Note If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct position of the

20

Seat belts

belt webbing, contact a specialised work- shop for help with any special devices to ensure the optimum protection of the seat belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking your car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the front seats and the side rear seats1) are equipped with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, although only in severe head-on, lateral and rear-end collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combination with the airbag system. In case of overturn, the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the head airbags are deployed.

Note If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components

of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar with these regula- tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seat belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- ers or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- sioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regulations, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other re- pair work, must be performed by a special- ised workshop only. The belt tensioners will only provide pro- tection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environment Airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re- quirements for their disposal.

1) Depending on version/market. 21

Safety

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is re- quired by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 16, The whys and wherefores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the air- bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis- tance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the speci- fied reference values, the front, side and/or head-protection airbags will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.

WARNING Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- suming an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries. All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

gered. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never trans- port children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not ap- propriate for their age, size or weight. To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- erly page 16.

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec- tion for the occupants in combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow- ing modules (as per vehicle equipment): Electronic control unit Front airbags for driver and passenger Side airbags Head airbag Airbag control lamp on the instrument panel page 24 Key-operated switch for front passenger airbag Control lamp for disabled/enabled status of the front passenger airbag.

22

Airbag system

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- luminate for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control lamp : does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 24, turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on, illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving.

The airbag system is not triggered if: the ignition is switched off there is a minor frontal collision there is a minor side collision there is a rear-end collision the vehicle turns over.

WARNING The seat belts and airbags can only pro- vide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 13. If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- tem, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the

system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousands of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to function when the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air- bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be gener- alised. Some factors play an important role, such as the properties of the object the vehi- cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec- tory and activates the respective restraint system.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede- fined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous head-on collisions: Driver airbag. Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous side-on collisions: Front side airbag on the side of the acci- dent. Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- cident.

In an accident with airbag activation: the interior lights switch on (if the interior light switch is in the courtesy light position); the hazard warning lights switch on; all doors are unlocked; the fuel supply to the engine is cut. an emergency call is started page 38.

23

Safety

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru- ment

Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners . Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

Front passenger front airbag deactivated. Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag activated. The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system control lamp remains on or flashes, it indi- cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system . Have the system

checked immediately by a specialised work- shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the warning lamp re- mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the control lamp on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the airbag system . If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the disabling of the airbag system . Have the system checked immediately by a speci- alised workshop.

WARNING In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop. Do not mount a child seat in the front passenger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descrip-

tions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Front airbags

Fig. 14 Driver airbag located in steering wheel.

Fig. 15 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

24

Airbag system

The driver's front airbag is housed in the steering wheel and that of the front passen- ger, on the instrument panel . Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The airbag covers fold open and remain at- tached to the steering wheel Fig. 14 and the dash panel Fig. 15when the driver and front passenger airbags, respectively, are triggered.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants ad- ditional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision .

Their special design allows the controlled es- cape of the propellant gas when an occu- pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi- ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. It is also important not to attach any ob- jects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the air- bag units.

Activate and deactivate front pas- senger front airbag

Fig. 16 Switch for activating and deactivating the front passenger airbag.

Fig. 17 Central part of the dashboard: control lamp for the deactivation of the front passen- ger front airbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti- vated, this means that only the front passen- ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen- ger front airbag Switch the ignition off. Open the door on the front passenger side. Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 16. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. Turn the key gently to change its position to (deactivate) or to (activate). If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. Close the front passenger door. When deactivating the airbag, switch the ignition on and check that the control lamp with the lettering re- mains lit in the middle of the dash panel Fig. 17. When reactivating the airbag, check that when the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not light up and the lamp lights up or 60 seconds and then turns off.

25

Safety

WARNING The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. Always switch off the ignition before dis- abling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do so could result in a fault in the airbag deactivation system. Never leave the key in the airbag disa- bling switch as it could get damaged or en- able or disable the airbag during driving. If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can fulfil its protective function.

Side airbags

Fig. 18 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 19 Illustration of completely inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger seat backrests Fig. 18.

The locations are identified by the text AIR- BAG in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air- bag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision .

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these airbags provide maximum protection.

WARNING If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident. In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the inte- rior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel. Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted. Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- ers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been closed properly. Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted inside the door pan- els. Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deploy- ment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup

26

Airbag system

holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered. Under no circumstances should protec- tive covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been ap- proved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the back- rest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness. Any damage to the original seat uphols- tery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. Any work on the side airbag system or re- moval and installation of the airbag com- ponents for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

head-protection airbags

Fig. 20 Location and deployment area of the head-protection airbag.

The head-protection airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors Fig. 20 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- protection airbag system gives the vehicle occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side collision .

The area framed in red is covered by the head-protection airbag when it is deployed Fig. 20 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- jects should never be placed or mounted in this area .

In the event of a side collision the head-pro- tection airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact.

WARNING In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. For safety reasons, the head-protection airbag must be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See your technical service to make this adjustment. There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protection airbag can deploy com- pletely without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

27

Safety

Any work on the head-protection airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- bag system operation. The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- ation of the side and head-protection air- bags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- aged, the airbag system may not work cor- rectly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.

Transporting children safely

Child safety

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned from accident statistics, we recommend that chil- dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- sons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to children page 18. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al- ways use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod- ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- gramme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke (not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de- signed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:

Child seats in the opposite direction of trav- el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)). Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX DUO Plus). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX (RMER KIDFIX XP). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX (TATAKI MAXI PLUS).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats. Always read and note page 30.

We recommend you always carry the manu- facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- gether with the on-board documentation.

28

Transporting children safely

Child seats group classification

Fig. 21 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap- proved and suitable for the child.

These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco- nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight group The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- ries:

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg

Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg

Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and ap- proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129 standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category Child seats may have the approval category of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific (all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i- Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).

Universal: child seats with universal appro- val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt. Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in addition to the standard requirements of

universal approval, requires safety devices to lock the child seat, which require additional testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- proval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats with vehicle-specific approval also include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must meet the requirements set out in the ECE- R129 standard in relation to installation and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- cle.

29

Safety

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 22 Airbag sticker: on the passengers sun visor

Fig. 23 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the passenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seat Take the following general warnings into ac- count if you are going to fit a child seat. They are valid for all child seats regardless of their attachment system.

Please read and follow the child seat man- ufacturer's operating instructions. The child seat should preferably be fitted to the rear seat behind the front passenger seat so that the child can exit the vehicle on the pavement side. Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ing child seats. To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child seat in the back in the case that it goes opposite to the direction of the car. In the case of front facing restraint systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet. If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- led, in which the method of attachment to the car is through the seat belt and support

bracket, it should never be installed in the central rear seat as the ground clearance is lower than in other places and the support bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- ciently stable. When fitting a child seat on the front pas- senger seat, the seat must be moved back- wards as far as possible and placed in the highest position. The backrest must also be put in a vertical position1).

Important information about the front pas- senger front airbag A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passeng- er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame Fig. 22.

Read and always observe the safety informa- tion included in the following chapters:

Safety distance with respect to the passen- ger airbag page 22. Objects between the passenger and the passenger side airbag in Front airbags on page 25.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena- bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing backward since the airbag can strike the seat

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

30

Transporting children safely

with such force that it can cause serious or fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. This is the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- bled with a key-operated switch page 25. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child page 29.

WARNING If a child seat is secured to the front pas- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases. An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest. Never install a child seat facing back- wards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if necessary, the front passenger front airbag must be deactiva- ted page 25. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest, most upright position. If you have a fixed seat, do not install any child restraint system in this location.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the air- bag when an adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat. Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- ling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- cle occupants. Never leave a child alone in the child seat or in the vehicle. Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci- dent. When a child seat is mounted in the rear seats, the door child-proof lock should be activated page 107.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach- ment systems are used for safely installing child seats.

Attachment systems overview ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ment system allowing quick and safe attach- ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- tachment establishes a rigid connection be- tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fit- ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found between the seat cushion and the backrest of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- FIX attachment systems are used mainly in Europe page 32. If necessary, ISOFIX at- tachment may have to be supplemented with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

Automatic three-point seat belt. When- ever possible, it is preferable to attach the child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than attaching them with an automatic three-point seat belt page 35.

Additional attachment:

Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are located at the back of the rear seat back- rest on the boot side page 34. The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol. Support bracket: some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket. The support bracket prevents the child seat

31

Safety

from tipping forward in the event of impact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats . For the assembly of this type of seat you should also consult the list of approved vehicles for this assembly, available in the instructions for child restraint systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child seats SEAT recommends attaching child seats as follows:

Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support bracket or i-Size.

Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury. Make sure the support bracket is correct- ly and safely installed.

Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether system

Fig. 24 Rear seat: slots die cut to access the ISOFIX / iSize securing rings.

Fig. 25 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the ISOFIX system.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear side seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether system.

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. The ISOFIX rings are located between the rear seat

backrest and the seat cushioning Fig. 24. The Top Tether rings are located on the rear part of the rear seat backrests (behind the backrest or in the luggage compartment) page 34.

32

Transporting children safely

To understand the compatibility of the ISO- FIX systems in the vehicle, check the table below.

Age group Height classification Front passenger seat Side rear seats Middle rear bench seat

Group 0: up to 10 kg E X IL-SU X

Group 0+: up to 13 kg

E X

IL-SU

X

D X X

C X X

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

D X

IL-SU, IUF

X

C X X

B X X

B1 X X

A X X

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg X IL-SU X

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg X IL-SU X

i-Size child restraint system X i-U X

Height classification: The height classification indication is equivalent to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In the case of child seats with universal or semi- universal approval, the height classification is shown on the ECE approval label. The height classification is specified on each child seat. X: Vehicle seat unsuitable for fitting this group of child seat. IL-SU: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting an ISOFIX child seat with semi-universal approval. The vehicle list provided by the child seat manufacturer must be consulted. IUF: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting an ISOFIX child seat with universal approval. i-U: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward- or rear-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval. Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward- or rear-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval. Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval.

33

Safety

Securing the child seat with the ISOFIX/i- Size system You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- turer's instructions.

Open the cut-out section behind the marked grooves to access the retaining rings Fig. 24. Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX/iSize retaining rings until the child seat is heard to engage securely Fig. 25. If the child seat is equipped with Top Tether anchor points, se- cure it to the correspondent ring page 34. Observe the manufacturer's in- structions. Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether attachment system are available from Tech- nical Services.

WARNING The securing rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Top Tether system child seats. Never secure other child seats that do not have the ISOFIX or Top Tether system, or safety belts or any other objects to the securing rings as this can result in poten- tially fatal injuries to the child.

Ensure that the child seat is correctly se- cured to the ISOFIX and Top Tether secur- ing rings.

Top Tether securing belts

Fig. 26 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.

Fig. 27 Back of the rear seats: Top Tether se- curing rings.

Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- cle anchor point, located at the back of the rear seat backrest and provide greater re- straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for- ward movements of the child seat in a crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun- ted seats Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufac- turer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

34

Transporting children safely

Securing the retainer strap Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining strap. Place the belt under the headrest of the back seat Fig. 26 (depending on the in- structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the headrest if necessary). Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest Fig. 27.

Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap Loosen the strap following the manufactur- er's instructions. Push the lock and release it from the an- choring support.

WARNING An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash. Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment. Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego- ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must check that the seat is approved for your vehi-

cle. You will find any necessary information on the child seats orange ECE approval la-

bel. The following table shows the different fitting options.

35

Safety

Age group Weight of the child Front passenger seat

Rear seatsFront passenger air- bag activated

Front passenger air- bag deactivated

Group 0 Up to 10 kg X U U

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg X U U

Group 1 Rear-facing From 9 to 18 kg X U U

Forward-facing From 9 to 18 kg U X U

Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg U X U

Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg U X U

U: universal. X: vehicle seat unsuitable for fitting this group of child seat.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ing child seats. Put the seat belt in place and pass it through the child seat according to the in- structions of the child seat manufacturer. Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle until you hear the engagement click.

WARNING When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suita- ble for age, weight and size. Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 30.

Fitting a child seat to the middle seat of the rear bench using the seat belt

Fig. 28 Position of the belt buckle on the rear seat

36

Transporting children safely

Belt buckle for the middle seat Belt buckle for the side seat

Child seats must always be fitted in the mid- dle of a vehicle seat. Take into account these instructions to ensure that this is possible on the middle seat of the rear bench:

Place the middle seat's belt buckle Fig. 28 1 behind the side seat's belt buck- le Fig. 28 2 . Plug the middle seat's seat belt into the middle seat's belt buckle Fig. 28 1 and make sure it clicks in place. For seat belts to be correctly fitted, the buckles must not be twisted Fig. 28.

1

2

37

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-help

Information, assistance and emergency call service

How it works

Fig. 29 On the roof console: voice service con- trols

Depending on the equipment, there is a con- trol on the roof console.

By pressing the buttons , and Fig. 29, you can run the following voice services:

information call assistance call emergency call service.

A built-in control unit establishes the connec- tion.

When a voice service is activated, a connec- tion is established with a phone line.

Control lamp The control has a warning lamp Fig. 29 (arrow). It shows the following statuses:

Off: the eCall service is not available. Flashes red, approx. 20 seconds after switching on the ignition: the eCall service is off. Lights up red: system failure. The eCall service is available with certain restrictions. SEAT suggests going to a specialised work- shop. Lights up green: the eCall service is avail- able. The system works correctly. Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice connection.

Information call1)

With the information call, a call is made to SEAT, S.A. customer service.

Assistance call1)

With the assistance call you can directly re- quest specialised help in the event of a breakdown.

Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is transmitted, e.g. your current location.

Emergency call service1)

If an emergency call is conducted manually or activated automatically in the event of an accident with an airbag triggering, informa- tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast, e.g. the current location of the vehicle page 309.

If the call is public, the person on the other end of the line uses the language of the country in which you are located.

If the call is private, the person on the other end of the line will assist you in the language you have configured in the Infotainment sys- tem. If the configured language is not availa- ble, English will be used.

Diversion to 112 emergency number In some situations where the emergency call service is limited or cannot be carried out, an emergency call is made to 112.

1) Only available in certain countries. 38

Self-help

The following conditions may cause the emergency call service to function in a limi- ted manner or the call to be diverted to the 112 emergency number:

The emergency call is made from an area with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as well as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build- ings, garages, underground walkways, moun- tains and valleys. In areas with sufficient mobile telephone and GPS coverage, the mobile telephone network of the telecommunications operator in question may not be available. In some countries, the emergency call serv- ice may not be available due to legal rea- sons. There is no valid license for the use of the emergency call service. The components of the vehicle required for the emergency phone call are damaged or do not get enough power. In some countries, the emergency call serv- ice may not be available and depending on the location of the vehicle, the control lamp LEDs, and even the operation of the different types of calls, could have a specific behav- iour.

Note Breakdown service and information calls can incur an additional cost on your tele- phone bill.

Emergency equipment

First aid kit, warning triangle and fire extinguishers

Warning triangle The use of reflective warning triangles is obligatory in emergencies in some countries. As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light bulbs.

The warning triangle is under the storage compartment which is located under the lug- gage compartment floor.

First aid kit The first-aid kit can go in the storage com- partment which is located under the luggage compartment floor.

The first aid kit must comply with legal re- quirements. Check the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is attached to the lug- gage compartment carpet with Velcro.

The fire extinguisher must conform to legal requirements, be ready for use and be checked regularly. Check the certification seal on the extinguisher.

WARNING Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be violently thrown in case of a sudden ma- noeuvre or braking and especially in acci- dents causing serious injury. Secure or store fire extinguishers, first aid kit, reflective vests and warning triangle securely in the vehicle.

Note The first aid kit, warning triangle, reflec- tive vests and fire extinguishers are not part of the vehicle's standard equipment. The warning triangle should meet legal requirements. Before acquiring accessories and emer- gency equipment see the instructions in Accessories and spares page 306.

39

Emergencies

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 30 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. To ac- cess the vehicle tools page 129.

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt Towing eye, removable Wheel spanner Crank handle for jack Jack Hook for extracting the central wheel trims Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are optional extras.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

WARNING When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set and spare wheel are loose in the interior they can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe- cially in accidents, causing serious injury. Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- rary spare wheel are safely secured in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can cause injury or accidents. Never work with inappropriate or dam- aged tools.

Note The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be greased using universal type grease.

Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)

The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a for- eign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.

Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must again check the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa- miliar with the procedure and you have the necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following cases: If the wheel rim has been damaged. In outside temperatures below -20C (-4F). In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre greater than 4 mm. If you have been driving with very low pres- sure or a completely flat tyre. If the sealant bottle has passed its use by date.

WARNING Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- rounding traffic to fill the tyre.

40

Self-help

Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid. All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area. Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users. Use the tyre mobility system only if you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance. The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- porary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop. Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mobility set as soon as possible. The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin. Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the reach of small children. Always stop the engine, apply the hand brake and put it in gear when using a man- ual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of involuntary movement of the vehicle.

WARNING A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- tional tyre. Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of used or expired sealant observ- ing any legal requirements.

Note A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships.

Note Take into account the separate instruction manual of the tyre mobility systems manu- facturer.

Anti-puncture kit contents

Fig. 31 Standard representation: anti-punc- ture kit contents.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compart- ment. It includes the following components Fig. 31:

Valve insert remover A sticker to be adhered to the instrument cluster, within the driver's visual field, to remind that the maximum advisable speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph Filler tube with cap Air compressor ON/OFF switch Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube).

1

2

3

4

5

6

41

Emergencies

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- toring system (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube). Tube for inflating tyres 12 volt connector Bottle of sealant Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for a valve insert. The valve in- sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part 11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use the Fig. 31 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously Fig. 31 10 . Screw the inflator tube Fig. 31 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break au- tomatically. Remove the lid from the filling tube Fig. 31 3 and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve. With the bottle upside down, empty all of the contents into the tyre.

7

8

9

10

11

Remove the bottle from the valve. Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ing the tool Fig. 31 1 .

Inflating the tyre Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube Fig. 31 8 into the tyre valve. Check that the air bleed screw is closed Fig. 31 6 . Start the engine and leave it running. Insert the connector Fig. 31 9 into the vehicle's 12-volt socket page 136. Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 31 5 . Keep the air compressor running until it rea- ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. Disconnect the air compressor. If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre. Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve. Repeat the inflation process. If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and request assistance from an authorised technician.

Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Attach the sticker Fig. 31 2 to the instru- ment cluster, within the driver's visual field. Check the pressure again after 10 minutes page 43.

WARNING When inflating the wheel, the air compres- sor and the inflator tube may become hot. Protect hands and skin from hot parts. Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable mate- rial. Allow them to cool before storing the de- vice. If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid overheating! Before switching on the air compressor again, let it cool for several mi- nutes.

42

Self-help

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube Fig. 31 5 again and check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. You should obtain professional assistance .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again. Carefully resume your journey until you reach the nearest specialised workshop with- out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious in- jury. Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. Seek specialist assistance.

Changing a wheel

What to do first

Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible. Apply the handbrake. Switch on the hazard warning lights. Manual transmission: select the 1st gear. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to position P. If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle. Make sure that the vehicle tool kit page 40 and the spare wheel page 296 are ready. Observe the applicable legislation for each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.). All occupants should leave the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

WARNING Always observe the above steps and pro- tect yourself and other road users. If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- cle from moving.

Wheel central trim

Fig. 32 Correct positioning of the central wheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access to the wheel nuts.

Removing Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools page 40) to one of the recesses of the central wheel trim and remove it.

Fitting Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The bottom of the S of the SEAT badge should align with the inflation valve Fig. 32 1 . Press the central trim firmly until it locks in with an audible click.

43

Emergencies

Note There is also a valve mark on the back of the central wheel trim that indicates the correct alignment.

Wheel bolt caps

Fig. 33 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.

Removal Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools Fig. 30) over the cap until it clicks into place Fig. 33. Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel nuts and should be remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel nuts.

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Fig. 34 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt Remove the wheel cover or the cap. Insert the special adapter Fig. 34 1 (ve- hicle tools page 40) onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go. Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto the adapter as far as it will go. Remove the wheel bolt page 44.

Note Make a note of the code number of the an- ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a new adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Official Service, indicating the code number.

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 35 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.

Fig. 36 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and the correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car to loosen the wheel nuts.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

44

Self-help

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push on the end of the wheel wrench with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go Fig. 35. Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- wise .

Important information about wheel nuts Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe- cially matched during construction. There- fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct wheel nuts with the right length and heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not even use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same model.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft locking bolt must be threaded onto positions Fig. 36 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valves po- sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the hubcap.

WARNING If the wheel nuts are not properly tight- ened, they could come loose while driving

and cause an accident, serious injury and loss of vehicle control. Use only wheel nuts which correspond to the rim in question. Never use different wheel nuts. Wheel nuts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease, and it should be pos- sible to screw them easily. To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only use the wheel wrench that came with the car from the factory. The wheel nuts should only be loosened slightly (about one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident! Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed tor- que, they could come loose while driving. Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims. If wheel nuts are tightened below the prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could come loose while driving. If tightening tor- que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads can be damaged.

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 37 Jack position points.

Fig. 38 Cross member: positioning the jack on the vehicle.

Rest the jack (vehicles tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slip- pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- ping .

45

Emergencies

Find the support point on the strut (sunken area) closest to the wheel to be changed Fig. 37. Turn the jack crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the tab 1 Fig. 38 is below the housing provi- ded. Align the jack so that tab 1 grips onto the housing provided on the strut and the mo- bile base 2 is resting on the ground. The base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- spect to the support point 1 . Continue turning the jack until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury. Make sure the jack remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack could slip or sink, respectively, with the conse- quent risk of causing injuries. Lift the vehicle using only the jack sup- plied from the factory. Other jacks, even those approved for other SEAT models could slip, with the consequent risk of in- jury. Place the jack only at the support points provided on the strut and align it. Other- wise, the jack could slip because it does

not have sufficient grip on the vehicle: risk of injury! You should never place a body limb such as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that is solely supported by the jack. If you have to work underneath the vehi- cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one side or the engine is running. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. The vehicle may come loose from the jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTION The vehicle must not be raised on the crossbar. Place the jack only at the support points provided on the strut and align it. Otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheel nuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea- son, please take care and get a second per- son to assist you.

Taking off the wheel Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box spanner and place them on a clean surface. Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel Check the direction of rotation of the tyre page 47.

Place the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel into position. Screw on the wheel nuts in position and tighten them loosely with a box spanner. To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts use the corresponding adaptor. Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack. Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di- agonal pairs (not in a circle). Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on.

The wheel nuts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nuts The recommended tightening torque for wheel nuts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the

46

Self-help

tightening torque checked immediately with a torque wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have any rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re- placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the indicated direction of rotation in order to guarantee optimum grip and help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is of particular importance when the road sur- face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos- sible or remount it with the correct direction of rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap . Return all tools to their proper storing loca- tion. If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug- gage compartment page 128. Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- ted tyre as soon as possible. In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica- tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory page 295. Have the tightening torque of the wheel nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor- que wrench page 46. Meanwhile, drive carefully. Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Wiper service position

Fig. 39 Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- ers are in service position Fig. 39.

Close the bonnet page 276. Switch the ignition on and off. Press the windscreen wiper lever down- wards briefly page 120 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- tion.

47

Emergencies

Note The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the bonnet is properly closed. You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a cover over the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.

Changing the wiper rear wiper blades

Fig. 40 Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Fig. 41 Changing the rear wiper blade

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the windscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty .

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a specialised workshop and cor- rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades should be replaced immediately. These are availa- ble from qualified workshops.

Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms Place the windscreen wipers in the service position page 47. Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades Raise the wiper arms. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades. If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades Lift and unfold the wiper arms. Press and hold release button Fig. 40 1 and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- rection of the arrow. Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place. Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade Lift and fold the wiper arm. Turn the blade slightly Fig. 41 (arrow A ).

48

Self-help

Hold down the release button 1 while gen- tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrow B . Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di- rection to the arrow B and hook into place button 1 . Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

WARNING Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- dent and serious injury. Always replace damaged or worn wind- screen wiper blades or blades that no lon- ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass. If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- aged. Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win- dows. In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in service position page 47.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, only leave them in the service position. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

Jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis- charged battery, the battery can be connec- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- tions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board network.

Jump start: description

Fig. 42 Diagram of connections for vehicles without Start Stop system

Fig. 43 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connections Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

1.

49

Emergencies

Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 42. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- hicle providing assistance B . In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle providing the current B Fig. 42. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block itself Fig. 43. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid metal component bol- ted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A . Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compart- ment.

Starting Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

5.

6.

7.

Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- onds, switch off the starter and try again after about 1 minute.

WARNING Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 276. The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capaci-

8.

9.

10.

11.

ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- ply could result in an explosion. Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- plosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- ted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion. Never attach the negative cable to fuel system components or the brake lines in the other vehicle. The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

50

Self-help

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine of the vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling another that is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relating to tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehicle with a discharged battery is not allowed. The jump start should be used instead page 49.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access system, towing is only allowed with the igni- tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is towed with the engine switched off and the ignition connected. Depending on the battery charge status, the drop in voltage may be so large, even after just a few minutes, that no electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the

Keyless Access system, the steering wheel could lock .

WARNING A vehicle with no power should never be towed. When towing, never remove the ignition key or disconnect the ignition with the start button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of the steering column could suddenly be- come blocked and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle. This could cause an accident, serious injury and loss of control of the vehicle. If during towing the vehicle runs out of power, stop towing immediately and re- quest the assistance of specialist person- nel.

WARNING Vehicle handling and braking capacity change considerably during towing. Please observe the following instructions to mini- mise the risk of serious accidents and in- jury: As the driver of the vehicle being towed: You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op- erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid crashing into the towing vehicle.

More strength is required at the steer- ing wheel as the power steering does

not operate when the engine is switch- ed off.

As the driver of the towing vehicle: Accelerate with particular care and

caution. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual and more

smoothly.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam- ple the paint, remove and replace the lid and towing eye carefully. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it during towing.

Instructions for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow- started. The jump start should be used in- stead page 49.

For technical reasons, towing the following vehicles is not allowed:

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system the steering re- mains locked and the electronic parking brake cannot be deactivated nor can the

51

Emergencies

electronic lock of the steering column be re- leased if they are activated. If the battery is flat, it is possible that the engine control units may not operate correct- ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (in the case of manual gear- boxes): Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. Keep the clutch pressed down. Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- ing lights of both vehicles. Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch. Once the engine starts, press the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle.

CAUTION When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam- age to the catalytic converter.

Towing instructions

Towing requires some expertise and experi- ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should be familiar with the difficulties involved in towing. For this reason, inexper- ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that no impermissible tractive forces or shocks are generated. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signal the change of direction even with the hazard warning lights turned on. To do so, at the same time, the turn signal lever must be oper- ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the hazard warning lights will go off. When the turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi- tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto- matically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is not blocked, and the electronic parking brake may be deactivated and the turn signals and wash/wipe operated. More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steering does not oper- ate when the engine is switched off.

You should depress the brake much harder as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid hitting the towing vehicle. Bear in mind the information and instruc- tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. Bear in mind the information and instruc- tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Tow rope or tow bar It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is not available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- ilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de- vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted if it has been specially designed to be instal- led on a tow hitch page 256.

52

Self-help

When the vehicle has to be towed: Check whether the vehicle may be towed page 53, Cases where towing the vehi- cle is not permitted.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope in the normal way, with all four wheels on the road; it can also be towed with either the front or rear wheels lifted off the road.

Switch the ignition on. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se- lector lever in the N page 196 position. Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph). The vehicle must not be towed further than 50 km (30 miles). If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with automatic transmission are only allowed to be towed with the front wheels suspended.

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per- mitted If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri- cant. If the battery is flat and the steering cannot be unlocked as a result, the electronic steer- ing lock and electronic parking brake cannot be disengaged. If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav- elled.

When, for example, after an accident, the smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering operation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle: Observe legal requirements. Keep in mind the instructions in the manual on towing vehicles.

CAUTION If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri- cant in the automatic transmission the car may only be towed with the driven wheels lifted clear of the road, or transported on a special car transporter or trailer.

Note The vehicle can only be towed if the steer- ing lock electronic gearbox lock is deacti- vated. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be started using jump leads to deacti- vate the steering column electronic gear- box lock.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 44 Right side of the front bumper: remove the cover.

Fig. 45 Right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the removable towline an- chorage is on the right side of the front bump- er underneath a cover Fig. 44.

The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle.

53

Emergencies

Bear in mind the instructions for towing page 52.

Fitting the towline anchorage Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment page 40. Remove the cover by pressing down on its right-hand side and leave it hanging from the vehicle Fig. 44. Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock- wise Fig. 45 . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object. Replace the cover and press on its left side until the tab snaps into the bumper. Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting. Make sure that there are no objects that prevent the eyebolt being screwed.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 46 On the right side of the rear bumper: remove the cover.

Fig. 47 On the right side of the rear bumper: towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid Fig. 46.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing page 52.

Fitting the rear towline anchorage Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment page 40. Press the right hand side of the cover Fig. 46 to unclip it. Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve- hicle. Screw the towline anchorage into the hous- ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock- wise Fig. 47 . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object. Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.

54

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death! Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury. Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) and size. Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- ple or similar.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec- tric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- trical elements and remove the key from the ignition. Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system.

Note One component may have more than one fuse. Several components may run on a single fuse. In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 48 On the driver's side dashboard: fuse box cover.

Opening and closing the fuse box situated below the dash panel Open: remove the fuse box cover in the di- rection indicated Fig. 48. Close: click the cover back into place.

Identifying fuses below the dashboard by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10 55

Emergencies

Colour Amp rating

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle. Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam- age to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 49 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover.

To open the engine compartment fuse box Open the bonnet page 276. Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover Fig. 49. Then lift the cover out. To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 50 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- cal equipment. Open the corresponding fuse box page 55, page 56.

Recognise a blown fuse A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 50.

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.

To replace a fuse Remove the fuse. Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size.

56

Fuses and bulbs

Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

Fuse placement

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumer/Amps

1 Tow hook 20

3 Sound amplifier 30

4 Cigarette lighter/12V power point 20

6 Central locking 40

8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30

10 Tow hook 25

11 CNG Gauge 7.5

13 Lights switch, steering column LSS and SMLS, diagnostic port, rain/light sensor

7.5

14 Steering Column LSS: wiper control 10

15 Kombi, Emergency call (+ NZ4) 7.5

16 Right lights power supply 40

17 Right Door Window Control 30

18 Windscreen wipers 30

No. Consumer/Amps

19 Radio, Multimedia System 25

20 Heated rear window 30

21 SCR Control Unit 30

23 Rear View Camera 7.5

24 Connectivity Box, connection for ex- ternal audio sources (Double USB), MIB display

5

25 Steering column electronics (MFL) 7.5

26 Gateway 7.5

27 Active suspension control unit 7.5

28 DWA Sensor 7.5

29 DWA Horn 7.5

31 9AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5

9AK Climatronic control unit 15

32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5

33 Left Door Window Control 30

35 Left lights power supply 40

36 Signal Horn 20

37 Heated seats control unit 30

38 BCM Power C63 30

39 BSD, PDC, MRR, PLA 10

No. Consumer/Amps

40

Light switch, diagnosis input, head- lamp range regulator, LSS steering column: lamps, halogen lamps, switch, reverse gear, electrochromic mirror, RKA without radio.

7.5

41 Regulation of unfolded exterior mir- rors, 7.5

42 Clutch pedal, ignition relays, CNG relay coil, AC pressure sensor 7.5

43 DWP relay coil, rear window wiper motor 15

44 Airbag 7.5

45 Left full LED headlight 7.5

46 Right full LED headlight 7.5

48 Steering column lock, Kessy Control Unit 7.5

49 SCR relay 7.5

53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5

58 Windscreen washer pump 7.5

59 Heated rear view mirrors 10

60 Tow hook 30

61 Tow hook 30

57

Emergencies

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumer/Amps

1 MPI Engine Injection Module 10

TSI Engine Injection Module 15

2

Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7), Low temperature coolant pump (TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil pressure regulat- ing valve (TJ1), AGR coolant valve (TJ1), High and low pressure water pumps (TJ1), SCR relay coil, cylin- der head water valve

7.5

3 Lambda probes 15

4 Engine petrol pump relay (MPI), Gauge control unit (TSI) 15

5

Electric fan (EC), LDR valve, canni- ster and variable distribution valve, oil pressure regulating valve, cylin- der disconnection valves, WIV sen- sor and CNG pressure regulator

10

6 Spark plugs (MPI and TSI) 20

7 Vacuum pump (TSI, CNG) 15

8 Injectors and EKP relay coil (MPI) 10

9 Servo sensor 7.5

10 Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and BCM 7.5

12 Detachable compressor 10

No. Consumer/Amps

14 ESC, Relay 87 coil and engine con- troller of engines (+ TJ1 / TJ4 / TH4 / T5I / T6P / TJ7 / TC5 / T5Y).

7.5

15 Automatic gearbox DQ200 and AQ160 30

17 50 Diag 7.5

18 BDM starter motor 30

20 ESC (Pump) 60

ABS (Pump) 40

21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25

24 TH4 Electric fan without A/C for moderate climate countries 30

25 TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder- ate climate countries 20

PTC1 40

26 TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electric fan for warm climate countries 50

27 TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder- ate climate countries 30

PTC2 40

28 PTC3 40

Note In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These

should only be changed by a specialised workshop. Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- pear in the following tables. Some of the equipment listed in the ta- bles below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras. Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject to change.

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of practical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom- mends that you consult a technical service or request assistance from a specialist. In gen- eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to the bulbs, other vehicle components require re- moval.

Always use identical bulbs with the same designation. The name can be found on the base of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, there are different sets of headlights and tail lights:

ECOLED (full-LED) main headlights

58

Fuses and bulbs

High (full-LED) main headlights Rear bulb light LED rear light

Full-LED headlight system Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Bulbs (12 V) Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an au- thorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Bulb lighta) Left Right

Brake lights 2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL

Side lights

Retro fog light P21 WLL

Reverse light P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi- cle. The position of lights may vary according to the country.

Light with LEDsa)

Left Right

Brake lights LED LED

Side lights LED LED

Retro fog light LED

Reverse light P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi- cle. The position of lights may vary according to the country.

WARNING Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

When changing the bulbs, take care not to injure yourself on parts with sharp edges.

CAUTION Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit could occur. Switch off the lights and the parking light before changing a bulb. Take good care to avoid damaging any components.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be tem- porarily misted. This has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted. Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.

59

Emergencies

Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead, since the fingerprints left on the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited on the reflector and will impair its surface. Depending on the level of equipment fit- ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than that of the car. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Tail light bulbs located in the body- work

Fig. 51 Luggage compartment: access to the bolt securing the tail light unit.

Fig. 52 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

Remove the lid, levering the flat side of a screwdriver into the recess Fig. 51 1 .

Remove the bulb connector 2 .

Unscrew the light securing bolt 3 by hand or using a screwdriver.

Remove the light from the body, gently pull- ing it toward you, and place on a clean, smooth surface.

Remove the bulb holder unlocking the re- taining tabs Fig. 52 A .

Change the damaged bulb.

To refit follow the steps in reverse order, tak- ing special care when fitting the bulb hold- er. The securing tabs must click into place.

CAUTION Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paintwork or any of its components.

Note Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, to avoid any scratches. For LED lights, you can only change the turn signal and reverse light bulbs.

60

Fuses and bulbs

Tail lights bulbs located in the rear lid

Fig. 53 Rear lid open: remove the cover.

Fig. 54 Remove the bulb holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

Remove the rear lid cover in the direction indicated Fig. 53.

Remove the bulb connector Fig. 54 1 .

Remove the bulb holder unlocking the re- taining tabs A .

Change the damaged bulb.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Carry out the same actions in reverse order for assembly and pay special attention to placing the bulb holder, ensuring that the tabs are properly secured.

Note For LED lights, you can only change the turn signal and reverse light bulbs.

number plate light

Note Number plate lights use LED technology. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an authorised workshop for replace- ment.

Side turn signals

Fig. 55 Turn signal integrated in the rear view mirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- grated in the rear view mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work- shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Taking into account that it consists of LED bulbs, the change should be made at a tech- nical service centre.

61

Emergencies

Interior light and front reading lights

Fig. 56 Front reading light.

To remove the glass Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-

ing and the glass Fig. 56.

Carefully remove the glass, levering it to avoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs Pull the bulbs outwards.

To remove the central bulb, hold and press to one side.

Assembly Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-

tly on the outer edge of the side light.

First fit the glass with the fastening tabs over the frame of the switch. Next press the

front part until the two long tabs click on the support.

Note In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to replace the light sources. If the light does not work, take the vehicle to an official Service.

Luggage compartment lighting

Fig. 57 Boot light.

Fig. 58 Boot light.

Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside edge using the flat side of a screwdriver Fig. 57.

Disconnect the cable.

Press the bulb sideways and remove it from its housing Fig. 58.

Change the bulb.

Connect the cable again.

Refit the bulb and press it in until it engages.

62

Operation

Fig. 59 Instruments and controls.

64

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Interior door handle Control for adjusting electric exteri- or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Air vents Turn signal and main beam lever . . . . 113 Steering wheel with horn and Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 On-board computer controls . . . . . 84 Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialogue system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 199

Instrument panel and warning lamps: Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . 86 Lever for: Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 120

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Wipe and wash system* . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Multi-function display control . . . . . 72 Infotainment system: Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Front passenger airbag disconnec- tion switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Switches for: Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Front passenger seat heating con- trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Gear lever Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Depending on the equipment, but- tons for: Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Start-Stop operation button . . . . . . . 193 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- cess closing and start-up sys- tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Depending on the equipment:

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . . . 142 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key- less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Steering column adjustment lev- er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Lever for unlocking the bonnet . . . . . . 277 Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Note Some of the equipment listed in this sec- tion is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras. The arrangement of controls on right- hand drive models may be slightly different from the layout shown in page 64. How- ever, the symbols used to identify the con- trols are the same.

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

65

Operation

Instruments and warn- ing/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument panel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEAT Cockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort set- tings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving. To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions

on the screen of the instrument panel and to the instructions on the screen of the Info- tainment system when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

66

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 60 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments Fig. 60:

Revolution counter (with the engine run- ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- nute) page 79.

1

Engine coolant temperature display page 82 or natural gas gauge in ve- hicles with natural gas engine (CNG) page 81 Displays on the screen page 69.

2

3

Adjuster button and display. Speedometer. Fuel gauge page 79.

4

5

6

67

Operation

Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 61 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: Engine coolant temperature display page 82 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- nute the engine is running page 79. Gear engaged or position of the selec- tor lever currently selected Screen display page 69 Speedometer Digital speed display Fuel gauge page 79. Information Profile page 68.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument panel digital with monochrome screen in col- our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi- ble using the button of the multifunction steering wheel. By selecting different infor- mation profiles, indications other than the classic circular instruments can be displayed, such as navigation data, multimedia informa- tion or travel data.

The 3 views are: Classic Dynamic Navigation

All views will display information on the screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi- cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).

In all views the information displayed in Infor- mation profiles can be customised Fig. 61 8 .

Information profiles Using the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option, you can choose between the different options for displaying the information to be displayed in the SEAT Digital Cockpit (select > View > Instrument cluster OR: > Interior

1) Depending on the version. 68

Instruments and warning/control lamps

settings > Infotainment > Instrument cluster).

Classic View The revolutions per minute and speedometer needles appear along the entire length Fig. 61.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC1)

Personalisation of the information that ap- pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of these items of information can be displayed at the same time, but the user chooses which to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can be memorised by exiting the menu or keeping the View button pressed.

Consumption. Graphic representation of the current consumption and digital display of the average consumption. Audio. Digital display of the current audio playback. Altitude. Digital display of the current alti- tude above sea level. Compass. Digital display of the compass.

Information about the final destination. Digital display of the remaining travelling time, distance to the destination and the esti- mated time of arrival. Operating range. Digital display of the re- maining range. Travel time. Route guidance. Journey. Digital display of the distance travelled. Assist systems. Graphic representation of different assistance systems. Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- ted. Navigation. Graphical representation of the navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num- ber and the contents of the selectable infor- mation profiles.

Navigation map in the SEAT Digital Cockpit

Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do

this, select the Navigation option in the menu on the instrument panel page 71.

Depending on the features or the navigation map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on both at the same time. If it is displayed only in the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma- noeuvres.

Transfer of navigation map The map is transferred from the Infotainment system to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice versa using the map transfer key.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu, you can transfer the map back to the Info- tainment System.

Status display

Possible indications on the instrument panel display Different pieces of information can be dis- played on the screen of the instrument panel, depending on the features of the vehicle. Doors, bonnet and rear lid open

1) Pre-set information depending on the selected Driving mode.

69

Operation

Warning and information messages Odometer Time page 79 Radio, media and navigation system indi- cations Indications of the phone Outside temperature Indications of the compass Selector lever positions Gear-change recommendation page 203 Display of travel data (multifunction dis- play) and menus for different settings page 71 Service interval display page 82 Speed warning page 72 Speed warning for winter tyres Start-Stop system status display page 193 Signs detected by the traffic signal detec- tion system page 75 Active cylinder management (ACT) status indication page 206 Low consumption driving Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Driver assistance system display page 209 Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- ing, the instrument panel display shows if any of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and, in some cases, it is also indica- ted by an audible warning. The display may vary according to the type of instrument pan- el fitted.

Selector lever positions (DSG dual clutch gearbox) The current position of the selector lever is shown on the side of the lever and on the in- strument panel display. When the lever is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in some cases, the gear engaged in each case is shown on the instrument panel display .

Outside temperature indicator If the outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +4 C (+39 F), the ice crystal symbol on the outside temperature dis- play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un- til the outside temperature exceeds +6 C (+43 F) .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux- iliary heater is switched on or when driving at very low speeds, the outside temperature in- dicated may be higher than the actual tem- perature due to the heat produced by the en- gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from -45 C (-49 F) to +76 C (+169 F).

Gear-change recommendation While driving, the instrument panel of certain vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda- tion for saving fuel page 203.

Odometer The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- tance travelled since the last time it was reset to zero.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Briefly press the button Fig. 60 4 to reset the trip recorder to 0. Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 seconds and the previous value will be displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain- ment system or the multifunction steering wheel page 72.

Speed warning for winter tyres If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is displayed on the instrument panel page 71.

70

Instruments and warning/control lamps

The speed warning can be set in the infotain- ment system using the infotainment button > Settings > Tyres; OR > Exterior settings > tyres page 92.

Indications of the compass Depending on the equipment, when the igni- tion is on, the instrument panel display indi- cates the direction in which you are driving with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and there is no route guidance active, the graphic rep- resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving Depending on the equipment, when the vehi- cle is moving is displayed on the instru- ment cluster display when the vehicle is in an economical consumption status due to active cylinder management (ACT) page 206.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Switch the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Hold the button Fig. 60 4 down for more than 15 seconds to display the iden- tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB).

Copyright Legal text about the property rights and copyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNING Even when the outside temperature is high- er than freezing temperature, some roads and bridges could be frozen. The ice crystal symbol indicates that there may be a risk of freezing. At outside temperatures above +4 C (+39 F), there may be ice even when the ice crystal symbol is not on. The outside temperature sensor takes a guideline measurement.

Note There are different instrument panels and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of dis- plays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the con- trol warning lamps. Some indications on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by a sudden event, e.g. an incoming call. Depending on the equipment, some set- tings and instructions can be carried out or displayed on the infotainment system as well. If there are several warnings at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one af-

ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- bols will stay on until you remove the cause. If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information items available will depend on the vehicles elec- tronics and features.

A specialised workshop can programme or modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is stationary. Driving data page 72 Assistance systems Front Assist On/Off page 216 ACC (only display) page 219 Lane Assist On/Off page 224 Side Assist On/Off page 229

Navigation Audio Telephone

71

Operation

Vehicle status page 73

Service Menu 3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can be adjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menu To open up the Service menu, select the Range information profile while in the Driv- ing data menu, and keep the key press- ed on the multifunction steering wheel for ap- proximately 4 seconds. When it is released, the Service menu will be displayed. Now you can browse through the menu using the keys on the multifunction steering wheel as usual.

Restart the service interval display Select the Service menu and follow the in- structions on the screen of the instrument panel.

Restart the oil service Select the Restore Oil service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument pan- el display.

Restart journey data Select the Reset trip menu and follow the instructions on the instrument panel display to reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Select the menu Engine code. The identify- ing letters of the engine will be shown on the instrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clock Select the Time menu and set the correct time by turning the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel.

Driving data indicator (multifunc- tion display)

The display of the travel data (multifunction display) shows different values about the journey and the consumption.

Change from one display to another Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel page 84.

Changing memory Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button of the multifunc- tion steering wheel.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: While in Travel data > General infor- mation press on the multi-function steer- ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo- ries1):

Since start: The memory is deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours. Since refuelling: Display and stor- age of the journey data and the con- sumption values collected. When refuel- ling, the memory is deleted. Long-term: This memory contains trav- el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or 9999.9 km. When one of these values is

1) This will show all data on the display at the same time: distance travelled, average con- sumption, average speed and autonomy.

72

Instruments and warning/control lamps

exceeded (varies depending on the ver- sion of the instrument panel), the memo- ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets Select the memory that you wish to erase. Hold the button of the multifunction steering wheel or the button of the multi- function wheel pressed down for about 2 seconds.

Select the instructions In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi- cle settings, you can display different travel data page 88.

Current consumption: The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the ve- hicle stopped, in litres/hour. Average consumption: The average fuel consumption is displayed after driv- ing for approximately 300 metres. Travelling time: This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig- nition was switched on. Range: Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled if the same driving style is maintained. Distance: Distance covered in km (m) after switching on the ignition.

Average speed: The average speed will be shown after driving for approxi- mately 100 metres. Digital speed display: Current speed displayed in digital format. Eco tips: Recommendations messag- es are shown to reduce consumption through good driving practices, e.g. Air conditioning on: close the win- dow.

Setting a speed warning Select the display Warning at --- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph. Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel to store the current speed and activate the warning. Activate: adjust to the desired speed within 5 seconds using the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds. The speed is stored and the warning activated. Deactivate: press button or button . The stored speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be- tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph).

Display Oil temperature The engine reaches its operating tempera- ture when, under normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80C (176F) and 120C (248F). If a great effort is required from the engine and the outside temperature is high, the engine oil temperature may in- crease. This does not present any problem as long as the warning lamps or page 280 do not appear on the display.

Warning and information messages (Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo- nents and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults displayed on the instrument panel as red and yellow warning symbols accompa- nied with messages and, depending on the case, even an audible warning page 86. The representation of the messages and symbols may vary depending on the version of the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually. To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or Vehicle page 71.

Priority 1 warning (red) The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- companied by audible warnings). Stop

73

Operation

driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi- nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio- nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow) The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- companied by audible warnings). Operating faults or the lack of operating fluids can cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, seek professional assistance.

Information message It provides information about processes in the vehicle.

Driver alert system (break recom- mendation)

Fig. 62 On the instrument panel display: driver alert system symbol.

The Fatigue detection informs the driver when their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue.

Function and operation Fatigue detection determines the driving be- haviour of the driver when starting a journey, making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- stantly compared with the current driving be- haviour. If the system detects that the driver is tired, an audible warning is given with a sound and an optic warning is shown with a symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display Fig. 62. The mes- sage on the instrument panel display is shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- pending on the case, is repeated. The system stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel display can be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multi function steering wheel page 84.

The message can be recalled to the instru- ment panel display using the multifunction display page 72.

Conditions of operation Driving behaviour is only calculated on speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- vated in the infotainment system using the function button > Driver assistance > Fa- tigue detector page 92. A mark indi- cates that the adjustment has been activa- ted.

System limitations The Fatigue detection has certain limitations inherent to the system. The following condi- tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- vent it from functioning.

At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) When cornering On roads in poor condition In unfavourable weather conditions When a sporty driving style is employed In the event of a serious distraction to the driver

Fatigue detection will be restored when the vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri- od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys- tem automatically re-establishes the tired- ness calculation. When driving at a faster

74

Instruments and warning/control lamps

speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- ted.

WARNING Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- gue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, sufficient in length when making long jour- neys. The driver always assumes the responsi- bility of driving to their full capacity. Never drive if you are tired. The system does not detect the tiredness of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section page 74, System limitations. In some situations, the system may incor- rectly interpret an intended driving ma- noeuvre as driver tiredness. No warning is given in the event of the ef- fect called microsleep! Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note Fatigue detection has been developed for driving on motorways and well paved roads only.

If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Road signs detection system1)

Fig. 63 On the instrument panel display: ex- amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- tions with their respective additional signs.

The traffic sign detection system records the standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle with a camera located on the base of the in- terior mirror and provides information about speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.

Within its limitations, the system also displays additional signals, such as time-specific pro- hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers page 256 or limitations that only apply in the event of rain. Even on journeys without signs, the system may display any applicable speed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does not work in all countries. Keep this in mind when travelling abroad.

Shown on the display In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads, besides speed limits and overtaking provisions the system also displays the end of prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the time in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system are displayed on the dash panel display Fig. 63 and, depending on the navigation system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- ment system as well page 88.

1) System available depending on the country. 75

Operation

Road sign detection system messages: There are no traffic signs available The system is in its start-up phase. OR: the camera has not recognized any mandatory or prohibitive sign.

Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display There is a fault in the system. Have the sys- tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Speed warning currently unavailable The speed warning function of the road sign detection system is faulty. Have the sys- tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Dynamic Road Sign Display: please clean the windscreen. The windscreen is dirty in the camera area. Clean the windscreen.

Dynamic Road Sign Display currently restricted. The navigation system is not transmitting data. Check if the navigation system has up- dated maps. OR: the vehicle is in a region not included on the navigation system's map.

No data available The traffic sign detection system does not work in the current country.

Activate and deactivate the road sign dis- play on the instrument panel The permanent traffic sign view on the instru- ment cluster can be switched on or off in the infotainment system using the function button > Driver assistance.

Display of traffic signs When the traffic sign detection system is con- nected, a camera located on the base of the interior rear-view mirror records the traffic signs in front of the vehicle. After checking and evaluating the information from the cam- era, the navigation system and the current vehicle data, up to three valid road signs are displayed, Fig. 63 with their additional signs.

The sign that is currently valid for the driver is shown in the left side of the screen For example, a maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (100 mph) Fig. 63 A.

A sign valid only in certain circum- stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown second, together with the additional rain sign.

The supplementary panel will display the circumstances (rain, times of day, fog, etc.) under which the displayed speed limit is in force.

Thirdly, a sign prohibiting overtaking is partially displayed. If there is no condi- tional speed limit and overtaking is pro-

First:

Second:

Additional sign:

Third:

hibited, the latter sign will be displayed in second place Fig. 63 C.

Speed warning If the system detects that the permitted speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver with a gong and visually with a message on the dash panel display.

The speed warning can be set or completely switched off in the infotainment system using the function button > Driver assis- tance page 88. The warning can be set to 0 km/h (0 mph), 5 km/h (3 mph) or 10 km/h (5 mph) above the maximum permitted speed.

Trailer mode In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory and a trailer that is electrically connected to the vehicle, it is possible to activate or deactivate the display of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi- tions. It can be activated or deactivated in the infotainment system using the function button > Driver assistance > Trailer as- sist page 88.

For trailer mode, the display of speed limits applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and

76

Instruments and warning/control lamps

130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed greater than that which is permitted in the country in question for driving with a trailer, the system automatically displays the usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h (50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- vated, the system displays the speed limits as if there were no trailer hitched.

Limited operation The traffic sign detection system has certain limitations. The following cases may lead the system to operate with limitations or not at all:

In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, rain, fog or intense mist. In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- on traffic or by the sun. When driving at high speeds. If the camera is covered or dirty. If the traffic signs are out of the camera's field of vision. If the traffic signs are partially or totally covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi- cles. In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil the regulations. In the case of damaged or bent traffic signs.

In the case of variable messages on over- head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traffic signs or other lighting units). If the maps on the navigation system are not up-to-date. In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on lorries.

WARNING The technology in the traffic sign detection system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works with- in the system's limits. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the traffic sign detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog may lead to the system failing to dis- play traffic signs or not displaying them correctly. If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- ered or damaged, system operation may be impaired.

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the traffic sign detec-

tion system may differ from the actual cur- rent traffic situation. The system may not detect or correctly show all the traffic signs. Traffic signs and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and dis- plays provided by the system.

WARNING If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- vere injuries. Never ignore the messages displayed. Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.

Note To avoid affecting the correct operation of the system, take the following points into consideration: Regularly clean the area of vision of the camera and keep it in a clean state, without snow or ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the camera. Always replace damaged or worn blades when required to avoid lines on the cam- era's field of vision. Check that the windscreen is not dam- aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- sion.

77

Operation

The use of outdated maps on the naviga- tion system may cause the system to show traffic signs incorrectly. In the waypoints mode of the navigation system, the traffic sign detection system is only partly available. Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehi- cle.

Eco-efficient driving assistance

Fig. 64 Eco-efficient driving assistance indi- cation (schematic representation).

Eco-efficient driving assistance helps you drive with care and with low energy con- sumption by following instructions superim- posed in the digital cockpit, depending on the situation.

When you approach places such as a junc- tion, a roundabout or a section of road with a speed limit, the symbol is displayed along with an event in the digital cockpit Fig. 64.

As soon as you follow the indication and take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle adapts, based on the selected driving profile and distance to the incident, brake energy re- cuperation and speed.

Eco-efficient driving assistance uses the trip data from the infotainment system and the sensors of some assist systems. If no destina- tion guidance is active, the most likely route is used.

Pressing the accelerator can cancel the in- tervention of the assistance at any time.

Eco-efficient driving assistance can be switched on and off in the infotainment sys- tem, in the assist system settings page 92.

Eco-efficient driving assistance is temporarily switched off if:

The gear selector is in the S position. The sport driving program is used. Driving with adaptive cruise control (ACC) or cruise control (GRA).

When these conditions no longer exist, the assistance is reactivated if it is switched on in the assist system settings.

Eco-efficient driving assistance is available depending on the equipment, although not in all countries.

WARNING The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Traffic signs on the road and traffic regu- lations have priority over eco-driving notes.

Note The appearance of the symbols may vary slightly depending on the equipment and model. System updates may modify or ex- pand the symbols. When the system is switched on, eco-ef- ficient driving assistance can also increase recuperation without any indication being displayed. This can occur in situations such as when the accelerator pedal is released when a vehicle is driving in front. In this case, energy recuperation is adapted match the speed of the vehicle in front without any indication being displayed.

78

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys- tem Press > Settings. Select the menu option Time and date to set the time page 88.

Setting the time on analogue the instru- ment panel To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), press and hold the button on the instrument panel until the Time is displayed. Release the button . The time is dis- played on the instrument panel display and the hours field is highlighted. Afterwards, press the button until the desired time is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold the button . When they have finished setting the hour, wait until the minute field is marked on the in- strument panel display. Afterwards, press the button until the desired time is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold the button . Release the button in order to finish setting the time.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en- gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, the rev counter offers you the possibility of using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed.

The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the red zone .

We recommend that you avoid high revs and that you follow the recommendations on the gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- al information in page 203, Selecting the optimal gear.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only remain in the red zone for a short period of time. When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and en- gine noise.

Fuel gauge

Fig. 65 Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge

Fig. 66 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge. 79

Operation

Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, the lower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has been reached . Refuel as soon as you have the opportunity. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash- es red.

The display only works when the ignition is switched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrument panel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- hicle in the page 316 section.

WARNING When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- vere injuries. If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes. The steering system and the driver assis- tance systems and brakes do not work when the engine is running irregularly or switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu- lar supply thereof. SEAT recommends always refuelling when the tank is approximately one quarter full, to prevent the vehicle from stopping due to a lack of fuel.

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system. The catalytic converter or the par- ticulate filter may get damaged!

Note The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to the fuel pump symbol points out towards the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank flap.

80

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Natural gas level (CNG) 3 Valid in vehicles equipped with natural gas engine (CNG)

Fig. 67 Analogue instrument panel: natural gas gauge

Natural gas gauge Petrol gauge

Control lamp

It lights up green Fig. 67 1

The vehicle is running on natural gas. The lamp goes off when the natural gas runs out. The engine changes to operate with petrol.

It lights up, and in addition, the lower diode lights up in red

The fuel reserve level has been reached. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash- es red.

A

B

The display only works when the ignition is switched on.

Things to note If the vehicle is left parked for a long time im- mediately after refuelling, the natural gas lev- el indicator may not accurately indicate the same level shown after refuelling when the vehicle is started up again. This is not due to a leak in the system, but to a drop in pressure in the gas tank for technical reasons after a cooling phase just after refuelling.

Note In vehicles with natural gas engines, the petrol tank fuel level gauge may display

the refuelled amount with a slight delay (depending on the refuelled amount).

81

Operation

Engine coolant temperature indica- tor.

Fig. 68 Analogue instrument panel: engine coolant temperature indicator.

Fig. 69 Digital instrument panel: engine cool- ant temperature indicator.

Cool zone. The engine has not reached operating temperature yet. Avoid high speeds and stressing the engine if it has not reached operating temperature.

A

Normal zone. At high outside tempera- tures and when making the engine work hard, the diodes may continue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is no cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work- ing hard, especially at high outside tem- peratures, the diodes may light up in the warning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only works when the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving! Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too high.

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and let it cool down. Check the engine coolant level page 282. If the warning lamp does not switch off even if the coolant level is correct, request assis- tance from specialised personnel.

B

C

CAUTION To ensure a long useful life for the engine, avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approxi- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature as a guide page 72 page 73. Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- atures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating. The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can reduce the cooling effect, which could cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe- cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on the instrument panel display and the Infotain- ment system.

There are different versions of instrument panels and infotainment systems, so the ver- sions and instructions on the screens may vary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en- gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and

82

Instruments and warning/control lamps

services without engine oil change (e.g. In- spection).

In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service intervals are al- ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- vals are determined individually. Thanks to technological progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. Because of the technology used by SEAT, with this service you only need to change the oil when the ve- hicle so requires. To calculate this variation (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are considered. The advance warning first appears 20 days before the date established for the corre- sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- maining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The cur- rent service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on- ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder If a service or an inspection has to be carried out soon, a service reminder will be dis- played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres that can still be travelled or the time until the next service.

Service due When the time for a service or an inspec- tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- ted when the ignition is switched on and the fixed key symbol may appear on the in- strument panel for a few seconds, along with one of the following messages:

Service now! Please have your vehicle inspec- ted. Oil change service due! Oil change service and inspection due!

Inspection of compressed natural gas tanks (CNG) reminder When less than 90 days for the review of the compressed natural gas tanks (CNG), when the ignition is switched on, the instrument panel display will a reminder for review of the gas tanks and an audible warning will be emitted.

As approaches the service date of inspection of the gas tanks, the message and the audi- ble warning will stop modify accordingly.

Consult a service notification With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current service notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on the infotainment system Press the function button > Settings > Service; OR > Vehicle status page 88. Select the Service menu option to display information about the services.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel Press and hold the button Fig. 60 4 for more than 5 seconds to con- sult the service message

Vehicles with digital instrument panel The date of the service can only be read through the Service menu page 72.

Resetting service interval display If the service was not carried out by a SEAT dealership, the display can be reset as fol- lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel Switch off the ignition, press and hold but- ton Fig. 60 4 . Switch ignition back on. Release the button and press it again for the next 20 seconds.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel The service interval display can only be re- set through the Service menu page 72.

83

Operation

Do not restart the indicator between the service intervals, otherwise the information displayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, the service interval display changes to a fixed service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible oil change service.

Note The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when button is pressed on the wiper lever, or the button on the multifunction steering wheel. In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the maximum service intervals permitted page 298. If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehi- cles with fixed service intervals. For this reason we recommend that the service in- terval display be reset by a SEAT author- ised Dealer. If the period of 48 months for an inspec- tion at a specialised workshop of com- pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee- ded, the vehicle may not working in this mode.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, the multifunction display can only be operat- ed with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Never use the menus on the instrument panel display while the vehicle is in motion.

Note After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- tery, check the system settings. If the pow- er supply is interrupted, the system settings might be incorrect or deleted.

Operation using the multifunction steering wheel

Fig. 70 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel: buttons to the menus and information displays on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 page 73 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 70.

Select a menu or an informative display Switch the ignition on. If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press the button Fig. 70; if necessary, several times. Use the or Fig. 70 to switch be- tween menus. To open the menu or the information dis- played, press the button Fig. 70 or wait

84

Instruments and warning/control lamps

a few seconds until the menu or the informa- tive display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb- wheel of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 70 until the desired option of the menu is highlighted. The option appears framed. Press the button Fig. 70 to make the required modifications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Press the or Fig. 70 button.

85

Operation

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

The control and warning lamps are indicators of warnings , faults or certain functions. Some control and warning lamps come on when the ignition is switched on, and switch off when the engine starts running, or while driving.

Depending on the model, additional text messages may be viewed on the instrument panel display. These may be purely informa- tive or they may be advising of the need for action page 66, Instrument panel.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- times a symbol may be displayed on the in- strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor- mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on page 234.

Fault in the brake system page 234.

Fault in the steering system page 204.

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt page 16.

Engine cooling fluid page 82.

Engine oil pressure page 280.

Alternator abnormality page 287.

Press the foot brake page 219.

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor- mation on the instrument panel display

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation page 237.

Fault in ASR or disconnection caused by the system; OR ASR in operation page 237.

ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in Sport mode page 237.

Fault in the ABS page 237.

Rear fog light switched on page 111.

Fault in the emission control system page 275.

Fault in the petrol engine management page 275.

Particulate filter blocked page 275.

Fault in the steering system page 204.

Tyre pressure monitor system page 295.

Fuel tank almost empty page 79.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten- sioners page 24.

Front passenger front airbag disabled page 24.

Front passenger airbag switched on page 24.

Defective active cruise control (ACC) page 224

Lane Assist (lane keeping system) page 225.

Error in the lane assist warning system page 225.

Travel Assist error page 229.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle page 111.

Low engine oil level page 280.

Fault in the gearbox page 202.

86

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Green indicator lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on page 111.

Trailer turn signals page 111.

Press the foot brake page 197.

Cruise control (GRA) page 213; OR speed limited page 214; OR Adaptive cruise control (ACC) page 220.

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) page 220.

Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning page 225.

Travel Assist active page 228.

Natural gas operating mode page 81.

Blue indicator lamps

Main beam on or flasher on page 111.

Other warning lamps

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not properly closed page 70.

Service interval display page 82.

Mobile phone connected through Blue- tooth .

Mobile phone charge level .

Risk of freezing page 70.

Start-Stop system activated page 193.

Start-Stop system unavailable page 193.

Low consumption driving status page 71.

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ig- nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri- ous injuries may occur. Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- ble. A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- dent for the driver and for other road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers. Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool. In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injuries page 276.

87

Operation

Infotainment system

Introduction

The infotainment system brings together im- portant vehicle functions and systems into a single central control unit, e.g. air condition- ing, menu settings, radio equipment and the navigation system.

The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.

General operating information General information on the operation of the infotainment system, as well as on the warn- ing and safety instructions that must be taken into account, is found in page 143.

How to move through the different menus and select them Switch the ignition on. If the Infotainment system is off, switch it on. The different menus are selected directly on the touch screen using texts, icons or but- tons.

If the box is checked , the function is activa- ted.

Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those menus.

Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show more content above or below those dis- played on the screen at that time, for exam-

ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll bar and pull up or down.

Tutorial The first time you connect the Infotainment system, a system tutorial will open with a brief description of the main functions and how to use it.

Help In the Help menu you will find more informa- tion and tips for using the Infotainment sys- tem.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Info- tainment system while driving could dis- tract you from traffic.

88

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Explanation of the function buttons

Fig. 71 Schematic representation: Overview of the possible function buttons on the screen

Top part of the screen Current time Driving profile and navigation informa- tion. If the user has an active route, both the time and the distance to the destina- tion are displayed. If there is no active route, the driving profile is displayed. On vehicles with no available driving profile, the current address is displayed whenev- er there is no active route. Information about the air condition- ing1). The current outside temperature is displayed.

A

B

C

Telephone information. Information re- garding your mobile device is displayed: available network signal strength, estab- lished Bluetooth connection, unanswered calls, new messages, battery status, etc. System customisation based on user and notifications. Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the person- alization function and can therefore be changed automatically when switching user accounts.

Bottom part of the screen1)

Main menu display mode:

D

E

F

: main menu with the 6 main functions divided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa- ble by the user by pressing on the func- tion). : main menu in mosaic mode (all func- tions of the Infotainment system) Direct accesses to the functions of the In- fotainment system (up to 10 functions, 5 + 5, customisable by the user). By pressing on the icon, you can select/deselect the functions in question.

G

1) Valid for the Connect System. 89

Operation

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 72 Schematic representation: Initial configu- ration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help you to set up your Infotainment system the first time you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainment system, the initial setup screen will be dis- played Fig. 72 if any parameters have not been set (marked with ) or if the Don't show again function button has not been pressed.

Function button: Function

Closes the Configuration Wizard.

Function button: Function

A Press to set day and time.

B Press to search and store to memory the radio stations that have the best reception at that moment.

C Press to go to the Online Media set- tings.

D Press to link your mobile phone to the Infotainment system.

Function button: Function

E Press to select your home address using your current position or by manually entering an address.

Don't show again

Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment sys- tem. If you want to run the initial con- figuration, it can be accessed through Settings > Initial con- figuration wizard.

Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

End Once one or more settings have been applied, press to finalise the setup in the main menu of the wizard.

90

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Vehicle information

Fig. 73 Schematic representation: Vehicle infor- mation and status

Pressing on > Selection and then on Vehicle info opens the Vehicle information menu with the following submenus:

Driving data. The average consump- tion, average speed, distance travelled, trip duration and autonomy are shown. It has 3 memories: Since start, Long- term and Since refuel page 72. Vehicle status. The warnings regarding faults, incidents, memorisation of the tyre pressure or information of the next inspection service are displayed.

91

Operation

Assist systems and vehicle settings

Fig. 74 Schematic representation: Assist systems and vehicle settings

The number of assist systems and settings depend on the version and the country in question. Driver assistance Park assist page 240. Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation

systems and brake assist page 237. Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop sys-

tem page 193. Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

page 219. Lane Assist (lane keeping system)

page 224. Emergency brake assistance system

(Front Assist) page 216. Fatigue detection page 74.

Traffic sign recognition page 75. Lane assist page 229.

92

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Multifunction steering wheel

Functions

Fig. 75 Controls on the steering wheel.

Fig. 76 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes multifunction modules from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con- trol and assist functions without the driver needing to be distracted from the road.

Buttons available depending on the version

Symbol Function

1 Turn: Turn volume up/down Press: Mute volume

2

Turn: Search in the instrument panel menu. In Navigation mode, turn to in- crease/decrease map size in SEAT Digital Cockpit Press: Select the highlighted option in the instrument panel

Radio: Search for the previous/next station. Media: Short press: previous/next track; long press: fast forward/rewind

Activate phone menu (answer call, end call)

Switch between media and radio sources

Change the instrument panel menu (previous/next)

Enable/disable voice control

Analogue Panel: No function Digital Panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit): Change digital panel views page 68

Connect/disconnect the Cruise con- trol system page 212 / ACC page 219 / Speed limiter page 214

Symbol Function

: Activate ACC / Cruise control sys- tem / Limiter : Reset programmed ACC speed or cruise control system

: Increase programmed speed : Decrease programmed speed

Open the drive assist menu in the in- strument panel

Modify the programmed ACC dis- tance

Switching Travel Assist on and off page 226

93

Operation

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Vehicle key

Fig. 77 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key.

Fig. 78 Vehicle key with alarm button.

Key to the Fig. 77, Fig. 78

Unlock the vehicle Lock the vehicle Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button until all the turn signals on the vehicle flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it will lock again. In addition, the lamp on the key flashes. Folding the key shaft in and out Alarm button. Only press in the event of an emergency! When the alarm button is pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn signals light up for a short time. Press again to disconnect.

With the vehicle key the vehicle may be locked or unlocked remotely page 96.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi- cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new battery is several metres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised page 96 or the battery changed page 95.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used.

1

2

3

4

5

Control lamp on the vehicle key When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, the control lamp flashes Fig. 77 (arrow) once briefly, but if the button is held down for a longer period the control lamp flashes sev- eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not light up when the button is pressed, replace the key's battery page 95.

Spare key To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle ID number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip which must be coded with the data from the vehicle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not contain a microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys which are specially cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe- cialised workshop or an approved key service qualified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use page 96.

WARNING Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they

94

Opening and closing

may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own. An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equip- ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergen- cy situation. Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect them from damage, impacts and humidity.

Note Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also possible even when you are outside the radius of action.

Key operation can be greatly influenced by overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle working in the same range of fre- quencies, for example, radio transmitters or mobile telephones. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control. If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed or one of the central locking but- tons page 99 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking brief- ly disconnects as protection against over- loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock it if necessary. Spare remote control keys are available at your Technical Service, where they must be matched to the locking system. Up to five remote control keys can be used.

To change the battery

Fig. 79 Vehicle key: opening the battery com- partment cover.

Fig. 80 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- cle key, under a cover.

95

Operation

Changing the battery Unfold the vehicle key blade page 94. Remove the cover from the back of the ve- hicle key Fig. 79 in the direction of the ar- row . Extract the battery from the compartment using a suitable thin object Fig. 80. Place the new battery in the compartment as shown Fig. 80, pressing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow . Fit the cover as shown Fig. 79, pressing it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di- rection to that shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.

WARNING Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- ter or any other button battery can cause serious and even fatal injuries within a very short time. Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with batteries out of reach of children. If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek immediate med- ical attention.

CAUTION If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-

place the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications. When fitting the battery, check that the polarity is correct.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries cor- rectly and with respect for the environ- ment.

Synchronize the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- ing the key. In this case, the key must be re- synchronised as described below:

While the vehicle is open: Press the button on the vehicle key. Then close the vehicle using the key shaft within one minute. If necessary, remove the cover from the driver door lever page 106.

While the vehicle is closed: Press the button on the vehicle key. Then close the vehicle using the key shaft within one minute. If necessary, remove the cover from the driver door lever page 106.

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when all the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking and ignition system, it may only be locked with the ignition off and the driver's door closed.

WARNING The incorrect use of the central locking system may cause serious injuries. The central locking system will lock all doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can prevent any non-authorised individual from opening the doors and accessing the vehi- cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or accident, locked doors will complicate ac- cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas- sengers. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. The central locking button can be used to lock all the doors from within. Therefore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures. Depending on the time of the year, tem- peratures inside a locked and closed

96

Opening and closing

vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young chil- dren. Never leave individuals locked in a closed and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle by themselves or get help.

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

From outside, using the vehicle key page 98. From outside with the Keyless Access page 99 system, From inside, by pushing the central locking button page 99.

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Security system Safe page 102 Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking Selective unlocking system Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system (Auto Lock) Emergency unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve- hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in- cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec- onds, it re-locks automatically.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle only When you lock the vehicle with the key, the doors and the rear lid are locked. When you open the door, you can either unlock only the driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select the required option, use the Infotainment sys- tem setting page 98.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock) The Auto Lock function locks the doors and the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph). The fuel tank flap is unlocked so that you can refuel without get- ting out of the vehicle.

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle can also be unlocked via the central locking switch or by pulling one of the inside door handles.

In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, the doors will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Turn signals The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one of the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed correctly.

Accidental lock-out The central locking system prevents you from being locked out of the vehicle in the follow- ing situations:

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the central locking switch page 99.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, when all the doors and the rear lid have been closed. This prevents the accidental locking of the vehicle.

Note Never leave any valuable items in the ve- hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe. If the LED on the driver door sill lights up for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked, the central locking system or anti- theft alarm is not working properly. You should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Official Service or specialised workshop.

97

Operation

Vehicle interior monitoring by the anti- theft alarm system will only function as in- tended if the windows and sunroof are closed.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed in the Infotainment system.

Unlocking doors Select: button > Settings > Opening and closing > Central locking > Un- locking the doors.

You can choose to unlock all the doors or only the driver door when you unlock the vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, only the driver door is unlocked. If that button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the rear lid will be unlocked.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicle doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- mation signal is heard.

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 81 Remote control key: buttons.

Lock: press the Fig. 81 button. Locking the vehicle without the Safe se- curity system: push the button again and hold for 2 seconds. Unlock: press the button. Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical- ly if you do not open one of the doors or the rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the car. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you press the button for at least one second.

Selective unlocking system The selective unlocking system allows you to only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank

flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain locked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap: Press (once) the button on the remote control key or turn the key once in the open- ing direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously: Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but- ton on the remote control key, or turn the key twice within 5 seconds in the opening direc- tion.

The Safe security system and the anti-theft alarm deactivate immediately when only the driver door is opened.

In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can programme the security central locking sys- tem directly page 98.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Lock- ing system Safe on page 103.

Note Do not use the remote control key until the vehicle is visible. Other functions of the remote control key page 109, Convenience open/close function.

98

Opening and closing

Unlocking and locking from the in- side

Fig. 82 Centre console: central locking but- ton.

Lock: press the Fig. 82 button. Unlock: Press the button again Fig. 82.

Please note the following when using the central locking switch Fig. 82to lock your vehicle: It is not possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). The central locking lamp Fig. 82 lights up when all the doors are closed and locked. You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. The fuel tank flap remains unlocked. In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will

be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac- cess and assistance.

WARNING The central locking switch also works with the ignition switched off, except when the safe system is activated. The central locking switch does not oper- ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside and the security system is switched on. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe- cially children, in the vehicle.

Note Your vehicle will lock automatically when it reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) (Auto Lock) page 97. You can unlock the vehicle again using the button on the central locking switch.

Unlock and lock the vehicle with Keyless Access

Fig. 83 Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 84 Door handle: sensor surfaces

Fig. 84 Unlocking sensor surface on the inside of the door handle. Locking sensor surface on the outside of the door handle.

A

B

99

Operation

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. To do this, all that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in the detection area where you are attempting to access the vehicle Fig. 83 and to touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles Fig. 84 .

The vehicle can only be unlocked and locked via the driver's door. When doing so, the re- mote control key must be no further than ap- prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key, e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can- not be opened again immediately. This will enable you to check that the doors are prop- erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre- sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec- essary adjustments can be made in vehicles with a driver information system page 92 page 71.

General information If a valid key is in the proximity of the car Fig. 83, the Keyless Access locking and starting system gives the key entry as soon as

one of the sensor surfaces on the front door handles is touched.

The following features are then available without having to use the vehicle key actively:

Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using the handle of the front drivers door or the softtouch/handle on the rear lid. Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the sensor on the driver door handle. Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine with the starter button page 189.

The central locking and locking systems op- erate in the same way as a normal locking and unlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a double flash of the indicator lights; locking by a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and the rear lid are closed leaving the last key used inside the vehicle and none outside, the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve- hicle's indicator lights will flash four times. The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if you do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-Entry) Grip the driver door handle. When you do this, you touch the sensor surface Fig. 84 A (arrow) of the handle and the vehicle un-

locks. Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info- tainment system configuration, pulling the door handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the Safe security sys- tem: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit) Switch the ignition off. Close the driver's door. Touch (once) the locking sensor surface Fig. 84 B (arrow) on the driver's door handle. The door that is used must be closed.

In vehicles with the Safe security sys- tem: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit) Switch the ignition off. Close the driver's door. Touch (once) the sensor surface Fig. 84 B (arrow) on the driver's door handle. The

vehicle locks with the Safe security system page 102. The door that is used must be closed.

100

Opening and closing

Touch (twice) the sensor surface Fig. 84 B (arrow) of the driver door handle to lock

the vehicle without activating the Safe se- curity system page 102.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- id vehicle key in the proximity Fig. 83.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehicle with a second key If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and it is locked from the outside with a second ve- hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked for engine ignition page 189. In order to enable engine ignition, press the button on the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensors If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a long period of time, the proximity sensors on the passenger doors are automatically disa- bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles is often activated in an unusual manner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches

of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity sensors are disabled for a certain period of time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

After a time. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ton on the key. OR: if the boot is opened. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with the key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection function You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Access unlocking for one locking and unlock- ing cycle.

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- wise the vehicle cannot be locked. Close the door. Push the central locking button on the re- mote control and touch the locking sensor surface of the driver door handle Fig. 84 B within the following 5 seconds. Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also possible if the vehicle is locked through the drivers door lock. To check that the function has been deacti- vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull

on the door handle. The door should not open.

The next time the door can only be unlocked via the remote control or the lock cylinder. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions To close all the electric windows using the comfort function, keep a finger on the lock- ing sensor surface Fig. 84 B (arrow) of the door handle for a few seconds until the windows have closed.

How the doors open when touching the sen- sor surface on the door handle will depend on the settings that have been activated in the infotainment system, using the button > Settings > Opening and closing.

CAUTION The sensor surfaces on the door handles could engage if hit with a water jet or high pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. If at least one of the electric windows is open and the sensor surface Fig. 84 B (arrow) on one of the handles is activated continuously, all win- dows will close.

Note If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost

101

Operation

or entirely out of charge, you will probably not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- cle can be unlocked or locked manually page 106. To control the proper locking of the vehi- cle, the release function is disabled for ap- prox. 2 seconds. If the message Keyless access system faulty is displayed on the screen of the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the operation of the Keyless Access system. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Depending on the function set on the in- fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte- rior mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle using the sensor surface on the driver and passenger door handles page 122. If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning will display on the dash panel screen. This could happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mobile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an aluminium case).

If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a layer of salt, the correct functioning of the sensors on the door handles may be affec- ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear stick is in position P. To improve the safety of your vehicle, the remote control of the system is equipped with a position sensor. If this remote control does not detect movement for a certain length of time, the system will conclude that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled.

Locking system Safe1)

When the vehicle is locked, the Safe securi- ty system puts the door handles out of opera- tion and makes it difficult for unauthorized people to enter. The doors cannot be opened from inside .

Depending on the vehicle, when switching the ignition off, a warning may be displayed on the control panel screen stating that the Safe security system is activated.

Lock the vehicle and activate the Safe security system. Press the locking button once on the ve- hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the Safe system. Press the locking button on the vehicle key twice. On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system: touch the sensor surface on the outside part of the door handle twice.

When the Safe security system is disa- bled, the following needs to be taken into account: The vehicle can be opened and unlocked from the inside using an inside door handle. The anti-theft alarm is activated. The vehicle interior monitoring system and the anti-tow system are disabled.

Safe status On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi- ble from outside the vehicle through the win- dow which shows the Safe system status.

We will know that Safe system is activated by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator

1) Available depending on market and version. 102

Opening and closing

will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted with an alarm, until they unlock.

Safe activated with or without the alarm: continuous flashing of the warning lamp. Safe deactivated without the alarm: the lamp stays off. Safe deactivated with the alarm: the warning lamp stays off.

WARNING Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the Safe security system is activa- ted, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. The system will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned on when the vehicle is locked with the key. The system is immediately activated and the turn signal light located on the driver door will flash along with the turn signals, indicating

that the alarm and the locking security sys- tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, they will not be included in the protection zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse- quently closed, they will be automatically in- cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle and the turn signals will flash accordingly when the doors close.

The turn signal light will flash twice on opening and deactivating the alarm. The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm? The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for about 30 seconds alongside a sound and optical (flashing) warning signals and will be repeated about ten times when the vehicle is locked and the following unauthorised ac- tions are attempted:

Opening a door that is mechanically un- locked using the vehicle key without switching on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer- tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is activated immediately on opening the door). A door is opened. Opening the bonnet. The rear lid is opened.

When the ignition is switched on with a non- authorised key. Undue manipulation of the alarm. Disconnection of the vehicle battery. Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring page 104). When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with anti-tow system page 104). When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with anti-tow system page 104). When the vehicle is transported on a ferry or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or vehicle interior monitoring page 104). When a trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button of the key. OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

If the drivers door is unlocked mechanically using the key, the key must be inserted into the ignition, and the ignition must be turned on within 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTION If the anti-theft security system is switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the

103

Operation

tow-away protection are automatically disconnected.

Note After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the battery from ex- hausting if the vehicle has been left parked for a long period of time. The alarm system remains activated. If, after the audible warning goes off, an- other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered again. The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button . If the driver door is unlocked mechanical- ly with the key, only the driver door is un- locked, the rest of the doors remain locked. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - but not unlocked - and the central locking button will be activated. If the vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not operate correctly. Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason. The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active.

Interior monitoring and the anti- tow system

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- rated in the anti-theft alarm which detects unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- sound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched on. In order to activate it, all the doors and the rear lid must be closed.

If the Safe page 102 security system is switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protection are automati- cally disconnected.

Activation It is automatically switched on when the anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation Open the vehicle with the key, either me- chanically or by pressing the button on the remote control. The time period from when the door is opened until the key is inserted in the contact should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. Press the button on the remote control twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors will be deactivated. The alarm system re- mains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system are automatically switched on again next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must be done each time that the vehicle is locked; if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system should be switched off if animals are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, their movements will trigger the alarm) or when, for example, the vehicle is transported or has to be towed with only one axle on the ground.

Deactivation through the infotainment system Turn off the ignition and select: button > Settings > Opening and closing > Central locking > Interior monitor- ing. When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protec- tion are switched off until the next time the door is opened.

False alarms Interior monitoring will only operate correctly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- serve related legal requirements.

104

Opening and closing

The following cases may cause a false alarm: Open windows (partially or fully). Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or completely). Movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items hanging from the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is activated without the volumetric sensor function, relocking will activate the alarm with all its functions, except the volumetric sensor. This function is reactivated when the alarm is switched on again, unless it is deliberately switched off. If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is different to the flash indicating the alarm is activated. The vibration of a mobile phone left in- side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in- terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors react to movements and shakes in- side the vehicle. If on activating the alarm, any door or the rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system will only be activated

once all the doors are closed (including the rear lid).

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man- ually and partially opened, for example if the key or the central locking is damaged.

WARNING Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury. If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get themselves to safety. Depending on the time of the year, tem- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- cle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING Getting in the way of the doors and the rear lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in- jury.

Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTION When opening and closing in an emergen- cy, carefully disassemble components and then reassemble them carefully to avoid damage to the vehicle.

105

Operation

Emergency unlocking or locking of the drivers door

Fig. 85 Driver door handle: Concealed lock cylinder.

Fig. 86 Driver door handle: lever the cover off

If the central locking system should fail to op- erate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system page 103.

Unfold the vehicle key blade page 94. Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle Fig. 86 then remove the cover upwards. Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will not be triggered page 103. After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de- activates the anti-theft alarm system.

Functions from the drivers door lock cylin- der If the vehicle does not have the Safe func- tion, the following comfort functions will not be available from the lock cylinder:

Raising and lowering the side windows.

Folding/unfolding the exterior mirrors. Unlocking of the central locking (only oper- ates the driver's door).

Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft page 96.

Emergency lock of doors without lock cylinders

Fig. 87 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail to work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder will have to be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the front of the front passenger's door and the rear doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

106

Opening and closing

Pull the cap out of the opening. Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side). Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can no lon- ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- rior door handle once to unlock and open the door.

Childproof locks

Fig. 88 Childproof lock on the left hand side door.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. This sys- tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- ted and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof lock.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, clockwise for the left hand side doors Fig. 88 and anti- clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti- vate.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise for the left hand side doors Fig. 88 and clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

The rear lid unlocks and locks together with the doors.

On vehicles with Keyless Access, the rear lid unlocks automatically when it is opened page 99.

WARNING Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and closing of the rear lid can cause acci- dents and serious injury. The rear lid must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights. Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury! Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving. Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid. Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi- soning!

107

Operation

Never leave the vehicle unattended or al- low children to play inside or next to it, es- pecially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle can reach extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries, illness or even death.

CAUTION Before opening or closing the rear lid, make sure that there is enough space to open or close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a garage.

Note Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage compartment.

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 89 Rear lid: handle

The rear lid opening system operates electri- cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressure on the handle Fig. 89.

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed. An audible warning is also given if it is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph).

Opening and closing To open: place slight pressure on the han- dle. The rear lid opens automatically. Close: hold the gate by one of the handles fitted to the inner lining and close it by moving it downwards.

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 90 Detail of the luggage compartment: emergency unlocking

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in the event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart- ment allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug- gage compartment Insert the key blade into the slot and move the key in the direction of the arrow until the lock unlocks Fig. 90.

108

Opening and closing

Window controls

Electrically opening and closing the windows

Fig. 91 Detail of the driver's door: window con- trols.

Opening the window: press the button . Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver door Window on the front left door Window on the front right door Window on the rear left door Window on the rear right door Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using the controls on the driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended .

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passen- ger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch The safety control Fig. 91 5 on the driver door can be used to disable the electric win- dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel- low if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off.

Convenience open/close function The electric windows can be opened or closed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening: Press and hold the button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sun- roof have reached the desired position. OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but- ton on the remote control key and then keep the key in the driver door lock until all the win- dows and the sunroof have reached the re- quired position.

Convenience closing: Press and hold button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sun- roof are closed . OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock" position until all the windows and the sunroof are closed.

Different settings can be changed using the infotainment system. Select: button > Settings > Opening and closing > Window operation > Convenience open- ing.

One-touch opening and closing The one-touch automatic opening and clos- ing is used to open or close the windows completely. It will not be necessary to hold the button of the corresponding electric win- dow.

For the automatic raising function: pull the button for the corresponding window up- wards until it reaches the second position.

109

Operation

For the automatic lowering function: push the button for the corresponding window up- wards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull on the button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing The one-touch opening and closing function is not active after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or is flat and will have to be reset.

Pull the button of the corresponding win- dow and hold it for one second in this posi- tion. Release the button and pull upwards and hold again. The one-touch function is now ready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windows can be reinitialised individually or several at a time.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Intro- duction on page 105. Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury. Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.

If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows. The doors can be locked using the re- mote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened. If necessary, use the safety switch to dis- able the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled. For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close func- tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the windows when pressing the button to close them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is released.

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will automatically open again page 110. If this happens, check why the window could not be closed before at- tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- jury when the electric windows close.

If a window is obstructed when closing au- tomatically, the window stops at this point and lowers immediately . Next, check why the window does not close before attempting it again. If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes again with difficulty or there is an obstruction, the automatic closing will stop working for 10 seconds. If the window is still obstructed, the window will stop at this point. If there is no obvious reason why the win- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- back function is now deactivated. If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Elec- trically opening and closing the windows on page 110. The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting

110

Lights

pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on page 113.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on page 117.

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on page 113.

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 87.

Headlight switch

Fig. 92 Dash panel: lights control.

Turn the switch to the required position Fig. 92.

Sym- bol

Ignition switch- ed off

Ignition is switched on

Fog lights, dipped beam and side lights off.

Light off or day- time driving light on

111

Operation

Sym- bol

Ignition switch- ed off

Ignition is switched on

The Coming home and Leaving home guide lights may be switched on.

Automatic control of dipped beam and daytime run- ning light.

Side light on. Daylight running lights switched on.

Dipped beam head- light off

Dipped beam switched on.

The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all situations.

Automatic dipped beam headlight control

The automatic dipped beam control is merely intended as an aid and is not able to recog- nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instrument panel and switch lighting switch on automatically in the following situations :

The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex- ample, when driving through a tunnel. They switch off when adequate lighting is detec- ted.

The rain sensor detects rain and activates the wipers. They switch off when the wipers have not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights consist of individu- al lights, integrated in the front headlights. These lights come on when the daytime run- ning lights are switched on. On vehicles equipped with LED tail lights, the rear side light is switched on as well .

The daytime running lights turn on every time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in position or , according to the level of ex- terior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a light sensor automatically switches dipped beam on and off (including the control and instru- ment lighting) or the daytime running lights depending on the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light The motorway light is available on vehicles equipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected and disconnected via the corresponding Infotainment system menu.

Activation: when going above 110 km/h (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip- ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- er's visibility distance.

Deactivation: when reducing the speed of the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dipped beam immediately returns to its nor- mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver that the lights have not been switched off If the key is not in the ignition and the driver door is open, an audible warning signal is heard in the following cases: this will remind you to turn the light off.

When the parking light is on page 113. When the light switch is in position or .

WARNING If the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, accidents may occur. The automatic dipped beam control ( ) only switches on the dipped beam when there are changes in light conditions but not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNING The side lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

112

Lights

Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weather or lighting conditions. On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, when activating the daytime running light the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi- cle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibility.

WARNING If the headlights are set too high and not used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or distracting other road users. This could re- sult in a serious accident. Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.

Note The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be observed. The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.

Fog lights

Fig. 93 Dash panel: lights control.

The warning lamps or also show, on the light switch or instrument panel, when the front fog lights are on.

Turning on the front fog lights : pull the light switch out from its first click position Fig. 93 1 , from positions , or . Turning on the rear fog light : pull the light switch fully out 2 from position , or . This control has only one position in ve- hicles without fog lights. To switch off the fog lights, press the light switch or turn it to position .

Note The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 94 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parking light (ignition switched off). Left turn light or left-hand parking light (ignition switched off). Main beam on: control lamp lit up on the instrument panel. Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con- trol lamp lit up.

Push the lever all the way down to turn off the corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals When the ignition is switched on, move the lever as far as possible upwards or down- wards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

1

2

3

4

113

Operation

The convenience turn signals are activated and deactivated in the infotainment system using button > Settings > Light > Light assistance > Convenience turn signals page 92.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond- ing menu, this function can be deactivated in a specialised workshop.

Parking light The parking lights will only work with the igni- tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning will sound while the driver door is open.

Switch the ignition off. Move the turn signal lever up or down.

When the parking light is switched on, the front side light and the tail light on the corre- sponding side of the vehicle turn on.

WARNING Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or forgetting to deactivate them can con- fuse other road users. This could result in a serious accident. Always give warning when you are going to change lane, overtake or when turning, activating the turn signal in good time. As soon as you have finished changing lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn signal off.

WARNING Incorrect use of the headlights may cause accidents and serious injury, as the main beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This is intended as a re- minder to switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to leave the parking light on. If the convenience turn signals are oper- ating (three flashes) and the other conven- ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- tive part stops flashing and only flashes once in the new part selected. The turn signal only works when the igni- tion is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switch- ed off. If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash at double speed. The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. In cold or damp weather conditions, the headlights, tail lights and turn signals may mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle lighting system.

The parking light does not activate auto- matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig- nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec- ted.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)

The main beam assist automatically prevents glare from vehicles moving in the opposite di- rection or ahead in the same direction. In ad- dition, the main beam assist detects illumina- ted areas and disconnects the main beam headlight when passing, e.g. by populated areas.

Within its limitations, the assist system auto- matically connects or disconnects the main beam headlight depending on the environ- mental and traffic conditions, as well as the speed .

Switching the main beam assist on Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch to the position Fig. 92. From the base position, press the turn signal and main beam headlights lever forwards Fig. 94 3

When the main beam assistant is on, the indicator lamp lights up on the instrument cluster display.

114

Lights

When the main beam light is on, the main beam indicator lamp lights up on the instru- ment cluster.

Switching the main beam assist off Turn the light switch to a position other than Fig. 92. OR: if the main beam assist is on, pull the turn signal and main beam headlight lever backwards Fig. 94 4 . OR: if the main beam assistant is on, but the main beam does not turn on, press the turn signal and main beam lever forwards to turn the main beam on manually. Pull the turn sig- nal and main beam lever back to switch off the main beam manually, if necessary. OR: switch off the ignition.

System limitations In the following cases, the main beam head- light must be switched off manually because the main beam assist will not disconnect it on time or disconnect it at all:

On roads with insufficient lighting with very reflective signs If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe- destrians or cyclists. On closed curves, when the traffic in the opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro- nounced slopes or inclinations.

On roads with traffic in the opposite direc- tion and with a central reservation barrier where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry driv- ers. In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain In the event of dust or sand storms If the windscreen is damaged in the cam- era's field of vision. If the camera's field of vision is misted up, dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice. If the camera is damaged or if the power supply has been cut off.

WARNING The convenience features of the main beam assist should not encourage the tak- ing of risks. The system is not a replace- ment for driver concentration. You are always in control of the main beam and adapting it to the light, visibility and traffic conditions. It is possible that the main beam head- light control does not recognise all driving situations and is limited under certain cir- cumstances. When the field of vision of the camera is dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the main beam control may be affected. This also applies when changes are made to the vehicle lighting system, for example, if additional headlights are installed.

CAUTION To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- tem, take the following points into consid- eration: Clean the field of vision of the camera regularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the camera. Check that the windscreen is not dam- aged in the area of the field of vision of the camera.

Note The headlight flasher can be turned on and off manually at any time with the turn signal and main beam lever page 113. If there are objects that radiate light in the camera's area of influence, e.g. a port- able navigation system, this may affect the operation of the main beam assist system.

Fog lights with cornering light func- tion

3 Not available on vehicles equipped with full- LED headlights and bulb fog lights.

The cornering light function is an additional function to the dipped beam headlights to improve lighting of the side of the road when taking a sharp turn at low speed.

115

Operation

The cornering light function works when the dipped beam headlights are already on and it is activated when driving at speeds below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the steering wheel is turned or the turn signal is switched on, the front fog light grad- ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering light function is gradually switched off. When engaging reverse gear, both front fog lights turn on.

Coming home and Leav- ing home function

The Coming home and Leaving home function lights up the vehicles immediate proximity when getting into and out of it in the dark. When switched on, the front position and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li- cense plate light come on.

The Leaving Home is controlled by a photo- sensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain- ment system you can adjust the duration of the light switch-off delay, and activate and deactivate the function.

Activating the Coming Home function For vehicles with light and rain sensors. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition with the light switch in posi- tion page 111. The automatic Coming Home function is only active when the light sensor detects darkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors. Switch the ignition off. Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home lighting comes on. The delay in switching off the headlights is counted from when the last door or boot hatch is closed.

The Coming Home lighting turns off in the following cases: Automatically, once the headlight turn off delay has elapsed. Automatically, when a vehicle door or the rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting the engine. When the rotary light switch is turned to po- sition page 111. With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the Leaving Home function Unlock the vehicle using the remote control. The Leaving Home function is only activa- ted when the light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases: Automatically, when the Leaving Home delay period ends (default 30 sec). When the vehicle is locked using the remote control. When the light switch is turned to position . With the ignition is switched on.

Note To activate the Coming Home and Leav- ing Home function, the rotary light switch must be in position and the light sensor must detect darkness.

116

Lights

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 95 Dash panel: hazard warning lights switch

The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehi- cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; for an automatic gearbox, move the gear lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

Emergency braking warning If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times per second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off automatically when the vehicle starts to move again.

WARNING The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz- ard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle. Due to the high temperatures that the catalytic converter can reach, never park in an area where the catalytic converter could come into contact with highly inflam- mable materials, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time, even if the ignition is switched off. The use of the hazard warning lights de- scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- utory requirements.

Light range control

Fig. 96 Next to the steering wheel: headlight range control.

The headlight range control Fig. 96 is modified according to the value of the head- light beam and the vehicle load status. This offers the driver optimum visibility and the headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers .

The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

117

Operation

To reset, turn switch Fig. 96:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart- ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart- ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart- ment full. With trailer and minimum drawbar load.

Driver only, luggage compartment full With trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

Dynamic headlight range control The control is not mounted in vehicles with dynamic headlight range control. The head- light range is automatically adjusted accord- ing to the vehicle load status when they are switched on.

WARNING Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that the headlights dazzle and distract oth- er drivers. This could result in a serious ac- cident. Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load status so that it does not blind other driv- ers.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights is asymmetric: the side of the road on which you are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a country that drives on the right travels to a country that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- mally necessary to cover part of the head- light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad- justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certain light values that must be complied with for designated points of the light distribution. This is known as Tourist light.

The light distribution of the HIGH headlights allows the specific tourist light values to be met without the need for stickers or changes being made to the settings.

For ECOLED headlamps, it is necessary to lower the mechanical adjustment of the headlamps by 0.15 (2.6 cm at 10 m). To do this, open the bonnet and adjust the vertical adjustment screws on both headlights. When the vehicle returns to its country of origin, the mechanical adjustment must be reset to its original status. If you do not have experience with this type of adjustment, SEAT recom- mends that you go to a technical service centre.

Note Tourist light is only allowed temporarily. If you are planning a long stay in a country that drives on the other side, you should take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel, displays and switches

Depending on the model, the lighting of the instrument cluster and switches can be ad- justed in the infotainment system, using the button > Settings > Light > Interi- or lighting button; OR: > Interior settings > Light > Instrument clus- ter page 92.

With the ignition on and without light activa- tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting remains activated in daytime light conditions. The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving through a tunnel without the function ac- tive, the instrument panel lighting may even switch off. The objective of this function is to provide the driver with a visual indication that he or she should activate the dipped beam.

118

Lights

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the following message will appear Turn on the lights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 97 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of the passenger compartment.

Knob Function

Turning the interior lights on or off.

The interior lights come on automati- cally when you unlock the vehicle, open a door or remove the key from the ignition. The light goes out a few seconds after closing all the doors, when locking the vehicle or connecting the ignition.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

The light controls may vary depending on the vehicle version.

Luggage compartment lighting The light is activated when the rear lid is open, even when the ignition and lights are turned off. For this reason, ensure that the rear lid is always closed.

Background lighting The background lighting lights up the area of the centre console and the footwell area and, depending on the version, the front door pan- els and the air vents as well.

It will be switched on at full brightness when the doors are opened and the lights will be dimmed during driving, when the light selec- tor is set to , or .

The intensity of the background lighting can be adjusted through the infotainment system menu. The colour can also be changed in versions with lighting on the front door panel (select > Settings > Background lighting; OR: > Background light- ing page 88).

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off after ap- prox. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has been removed and the courtesy light

position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

119

Operation

Visibility

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 98 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper.

More the lever to the required position:

0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals. Use control Fig. 98 A to set the in- terval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

More the lever to the required position:

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold the lever down for more time to in- crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreen washer function is activated by push- ing the lever towards the steering wheel, and the wipers operate simulta- neously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wip- er will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti- vated by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNING In cold conditions you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.

CAUTION If the ignition is switched off while the wind- screen wipers are switched on, they com- plete their wipe and return to the rest posi- tion. When the ignition is switched back on, the windscreen wiper will continue to oper- ate at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and

other obstacles on the windscreen may damage the wiper and the windscreen wip- er motor. If necessary, remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before starting your journey. Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the windscreen wipers while dry can cause damage. In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in service position page 47.

Note The windscreen and window wipers only function when the ignition is switched on and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are closed. The interval wipe speed varies according to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is moving, the more often the windscreen is cleaned. The rear wiper is automatically switched on when the windscreen wiper is on and the car is in reverse gear.

120

Visibility

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ- ent situations If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi- tion temporarily moves to the previous posi- tion. The air conditioner comes on for approxi- mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode when the windscreen washer is activated, to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash- er fluid entering the inside the vehicle. When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary according to the speed. The higher the vehi- cle speed the shorter the intervals.

Note The wiper will try to wipe away any ob- stacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper back on again. If you stop the vehicle with the wind- screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto- matically change to a lower position speed. The set speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls away. The windscreen will be wiped again ap- proximately 5 seconds after the wind- screen washer has been activated, provi- ded the vehicle is moving (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec- onds after the drip function, a new wash

sequence will begin without performing the last wipe. For the drip function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and then on again.

Rain sensor

Fig. 99 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

Fig. 100 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain . The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Manual wipe page 120.

Move the lever to the required position Fig. 99:

Rain sensor off. Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- sary. Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor Set control to the right: high sensitivity. Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts operating again when the windscreen wipers are in position 1 and the vehicle is travelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

Modified behaviour of the rain sensor Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- ings on the sensitive surface Fig. 100 of the rain sensor include:

Damaged wipers: a film of water on the damaged blades may lengthen the activa- tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re- sult in a fast and continuous wipe. Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger the windscreen wiper.

0

1

A

121

Operation

Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on the roads may cause an excessively long wipe when the windscreen is almost dry. Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or make it react more slowly, later or not at all. Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re- duction in the sensitive surface area and adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sensor will vary with the size of the damage caused by the stone.

WARNING The rain sensor may not detect enough rain to switch on the wipers. If necessary, switch on the wipers man- ually when water on the windscreen ob- structs visibility.

Note Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sensor regularly and check the blades for damage Fig. 100 (arrow). To remove wax and coatings, we recom- mend a window cleaner containing alco- hol. Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor. This may cause sensor disruption or faults.

Mirrors

Interior mirror anti-dazzle function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz- zle function The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- matically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNING In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- id may leak. This could cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you come into contact with this liquid, it must be rinsed with large quantities of water. If necessary, get medial help.

CAUTION In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur- faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possible.

Note If the light falling on the interior mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun blind), the an- ti-dazzle mirror with automatic adjustment will not operate perfectly. When the interior lights are on or reverse gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle position. If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti- dazzle function from working well or even from working at all.

Manually folding the exterior mir- rors

The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol- ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to- wards the vehicle.

Note Before washing the vehicle with an auto- matic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid damage.

122

Visibility

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 101 Detail of the driver's door: control for the exterior mirror.

Turn the control to the corresponding posi- tion:

Turning the knob to the desired position, adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired. Folding in mirrors.

Heated exterior mirrors Press the demisting switch next to the air conditioning controls page 137. The mirrors demist for some minutes to pre- vent draining the battery unnecessarily. If necessary, press the button again to re- peat the function.

L/R

The exterior mirror heating is not activated in temperatures above approximately +20C (+68F).

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the vehicle Button > Settings > Mirrors and wipers > Mirrors in the infotainment sys- tem can be used to have the exterior mirrors fold in when the vehicle is parked and locked page 88.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au- tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are deployed automatically.

WARNING Convex or wide-angle exterior mirrors give a larger field of vision. However, they make objects look smaller and further away than they really are. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could mis- judge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNING Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking care to avoid injuries. Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror when there is no-one in the way of the mir- ror.

When moving the mirror, take care not to trap fingers between the mirror and the mirror bracket.

CAUTION If one of the mirror housings is knocked out of position (e.g. when parking), the mir- rors must first be fully retracted with the electric control. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function. Before washing the vehicle in an auto- matic car wash, please make sure to re- tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. Electrically retracta- ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand. Always use the electrical power control.

Note If the electrical adjustment should fail to operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus- ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass. The fold-in function on the exterior mir- rors will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h (25 mph).

123

Operation

Sun protection

sun blind

Fig. 102 Sun visor on the driver side.

Options for adjusting driver and front pas- senger sun visors Lower the sun visor towards the wind- screen. The sun visor can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards the door Fig. 102 1 . Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi- tudinally backwards.

There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a cover 2 .

WARNING Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use.

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Fig. 103 Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and move the seat. The seat must engage when the lever is released! Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from its home position. Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

WARNING Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac- cidents and severe injuries.

1

2

3

124

Seats and headrests

Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary, as the seats could move unex- pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur- thermore, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat. Adjust the height, position and inclination of the front seats only when their move- ment area is empty. Make sure there are no objects in that area. Make sure that the movement and lock- ing areas of the seats are clean.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas- sembly of the headrests are described below. Always make sure that the seats are correctly adjusted page 13.

All seats are equipped with a headrest. The central rear headrest is only intended for the central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do not install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrest Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level.

Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short people Lower the headrest completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. In the lowest position, there may be a small distance be- tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall people Push the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNING If travelling with the headrests removed or improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres increases. Always travel with the headrest correctly installed and adjusted. To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in the event of an accident, adjust the head- rest correctly based on your height, always making sure that its upper edge is at the same height as the top of the head, but never below eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as possible and centred. Never adjust the headrest while the vehi- cle is in motion. Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the headrests are in the non-use position.

CAUTION When assembling and disassembling the headrests, do not let them meet the top lin- ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the front seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not, this could damage the vehicle.

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 104 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 105 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment. 125

Operation

Adjusting the height of the headrests Move the headrest up or down in the direc- tion of the corresponding arrow. Regarding the rear headrest, to both raise and lower, press the button Fig. 104 1 ; for the rear headrests it is only necessary to press the button Fig. 105 1 to lower them in Introduction on page 125. The headrest must lock correctly in one po- sition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 106 Front headrest: removal.

Fig. 107 Rear headrest: removal.

Removing the front head restraints Lower the head restraint if necessary. To unlock it, look for the rabbet on the bot- tom of the backrest and press in the direction of the arrow Fig. 106 1 . Remove the head restraint in the direction of the arrow 2 .

Fitting the front head restraints Place the head restraint in the correct posi- tion on the guides of the corresponding back- rest and insert it. Press the head restraint downwards until the bars lock. Adjust the head restraint according to the instructions on the correct position of the seat.

Removing the rear headrests To remove the headrest, the corresponding backrest must be partially folded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 127. Move the headrest upwards until it arrives to the top. Press button Fig. 107 1 , while simulta- neously pressing on the security hole 2 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrest. Move the backrest until it engages properly in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 127.

Fitting the rear headrests To mount the external headrests, the corre- sponding backrest must be partially folded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 127. Insert the headrest bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It should not be possible to remove the headrest from the backrest. Move the backrest until it engages properly in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 127.

126

Seats and headrests

WARNING Remove the rear headrests only when it is necessary to fit a child seat. After removing a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

Seat functions

Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest

Fig. 108 Rear seat: folding the backrest.

On split rear seats, the backrest can be low- ered in two sections.

Folding the backrest forwards Completely lower the rear headrests page 125. Press the unlock button Fig. 108 1 for- wards and at the same time fold the backrest

down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button 2 is visi- ble.

Converting the table to a seat Raise and lock in the back rest. The red marking on the tab 2 should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.

WARNING Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest while driving. Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest. When lowering or lifting the rear seat backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of its path. For the rear seat belts to offer the neces- sary protection all the parts of the rear backrest must be properly engaged. This is particularly important in the case of the centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose backrest is not properly engag- ed they will fly forward, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. A red signal on the button 2 warns that the backrest is not engaged. Always check that the red marking is not visible when the backrest is in the upright position.

When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is not properly engaged nobody else can travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child).

CAUTION Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- cle and other objects if the rear seat back- rest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. Before lowering the rear seat backrest, always adjust the front seats so that nei- ther the headrests nor the cushions of the rear backrest can hit them.

127

Operation

Transport and practical equipment

Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage in the vehicle, in a trailer page 256 and on the roof page 132. When doing so, please consider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly as possible. Always place equipment and heavy ob- jects in the boot . Position heavy items in the boot as far for- ward as possible. Take into account the maximum authorised weight per axle, as well as the maximum au- thorised weight of the vehicle page 316. Secure the objects to the fastening rings of the boot using appropriate chains or belts page 131. Also place small objects safely. Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into account the pressure adhesive of the tyres page 291.

In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys- tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa- ry page 295.

WARNING Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri- ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. Partic- ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy- ing and they are thrown across the inside of the vehicle. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: Place all objects inside the vehicle safe- ly. Secure all objects, little and large. Place the objects in the cabin in such a way that they can never reach the airbag deployment areas while the vehicle is in motion. Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Place the objects in such a way that they never force any occupant of the vehicle to sit in an incorrect position. When transporting objects that take up a seat, never let anyone use that seat. Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects loose in open storage compartment of the vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat or on the dashboard. Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin and store them safely.

WARNING The transport of heavy object changes ve- hicle handling and increases braking dis- tance. Heavy objects that are not properly placed or secured may cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries. Never put too much load in the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour and brak- ing ability. When transporting heavy objects, the driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due to the displacement of the centre of gravi- ty. Always distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly and horizontally as possible. Always place heavy objects in the boot before the rear axle and as far away from it as possible. Objects in the luggage compartment that are unsecured could move suddenly and modify the handling of the vehicle. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual.

128

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- pecially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death. Close and lock all the doors and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTION Electrical wires or, depending on the fea- tures, the antenna embedded into the rear windows could be damaged, even irrepara- bly, if they are in contact with objects.

Note Straps for securing the load to the fasten- ing rings are commercially available from accessory shops.

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 109 In the luggage compartment: remov- ing and fitting the shelf.

Fig. 110 In the luggage compartment: remov- ing and fitting the shelf.

Removing Detach the cord loops Fig. 109 B from their hooks A .

Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- ports Fig. 110 by pulling it upwards and then take it out.

Storing the rear shelf Depending on the equipment, once the lug- gage compartment shelf has been removed, it can be stored under the boot's variable floor page 130.

Remove the side cover sliding it upwards and place the shelf in the bottom. Replace the side cover.

To remove it proceed in reverse order.

Fitting Insert the cover horizontally so that the re- cess fits onto the axis of the supports Fig. 110 and press down until it engages. Hook the loops Fig. 109 B to the rear lid.

WARNING Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car- ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in- jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob- jects or in bags on the rear shelf. Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

129

Operation

CAUTION Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted. An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not cor- rectly seated and it may be bent or dam- aged. If the luggage compartment is overloa- ded, remove the tray.

Note Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment cover, rear visibility is not reduced.

Variable luggage compartment floor

Fig. 111 Variable luggage compartment floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 112 Variable luggage compartment floor: inclined position.

Variable floor in high position To move from the low position to the high position, lift the floor using the handle Fig. 111 1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position To move from the high position to the low position, lift the floor using the handle Fig. 111 1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . Now let the front part fall to the floor and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest; lower the floor at the same time with the handle 1 .

130

Transport and practical equipment

Variable floor in the tilted position When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit area.

Lift the variable floor in the high position us- ing handle Fig. 111 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until it folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself. Rest the floor on its housings Fig. 112 (ar- rows).

WARNING Always secure objects, even when the luggage compartment floor is properly lif- ted. Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor. Only objects that do not weigh than ap- proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage com- partment floor.

CAUTION The maximum weight that can be loaded on the luggage compartment variable floor in the top position is 100 kg. Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always carefully

guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings

Fig. 113 Location of fastening rings in luggage compartment.

There are fastening rings Fig. 113 on the front and rear of the boot to secure loose ob- jects and luggage with fastening belts and cords.

WARNING If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be launched across the passen- ger compartment and cause serious or fa- tal injuries.

Always use belts or straps that are suita- ble and in good condition. Tighten the belts and straps in a cross layout over the load placed on the boot floor and secure them to the fastening rings safely. Never exceed the maximum tensile load of the fastening rings when securing ob- jects. Make sure that, particularly for flat ob- jects, the upper edge of the load is higher than the fastening rings. Depending on the features, take into ac- count the instruction panels on the boot on how to place the load. Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.

Note The maximum tensile load that the fas- tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN. Belts, straps and securing systems for the appropriate load can be obtained from specialised dealerships. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

131

Operation

Roof carrier

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in the roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof carrier system should be disassembled. When they are not used. When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING Always secure the load properly using belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition. Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen- tre of gravity and driving performance. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

CAUTION Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- er system before entering a car wash. Vehicle height is increased by the instal- lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system and the load secured on them. For this pur- pose, check that your vehicle's height does not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- ple, for underpasses or for entering garage doors. Any cross bars, roof carrier systems or loads secured to them must not interfere with the roof aerial or block the path of the rear lid. On opening the rear lid make sure that it does not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environment When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Securing the crossbars and the roof carrier system

Fig. 114 Attachment points for the roof railings for the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of special roof carrier systems. For safety rea- sons, special fixtures must be used to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly. Always take the as- sembly instructions that come with the cross- bars and the roof carrier system in question into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- ings. The distance between cross bars

132

Transport and practical equipment

Fig. 114 A should be 75 cm and the dis- tance between the cross bars and the brack- ets of the roof railings B should be 5 cm.

WARNING Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- bars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries. Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account. Check threaded joints and attachments travelling and if necessary tighten them af- ter you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threa- ded joints whenever you stop for a rest. Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system.

Note Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carri- er system carefully and keep them in the vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- stalled .

Maximum authorised cargo on the roof The maximum authorised cargo permitted for transporting on the roof is 75 kg. This figure comes from the combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on the roof .

Always check the weight of the roof carrier system, the cross bars and the weight of the load to be transported and weigh them if necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load Distribute loads uniformly and secure them correctly .

Check attachments Once the cross bars and roof carrier system have been installed, check the bolted con- nections and attachments after a short jour- ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- cy.

WARNING Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- hicle's maximum authorised weight. Never exceed the load capacity of the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even if the maximum authorised roof load has not been reached. Secure heavy items as far forward as possible and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.

WARNING If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause accidents and injuries. Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for small or light items.

WARNING Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- cured could be thrown across the cabin in

133

Operation

the event of sudden braking or manoeu- vring. This may cause severe injuries as well as loss of control of the vehicle. Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or heavy items in open storage compartments of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the cover behind the rear seats, or inside pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi- cle. Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi- cult the use of the pedals. This may cause loss of control of the vehicle and increases the risk of severe injuries. Make sure that nothing prevents you from using the pedals at any time. Always secure the mat in the footwell. Never place other mats or other type of covers on the factory-fitted mat. Ensure that no objects can fall into the driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo- tion. When the vehicle is stationary, remove the objects in the footwell.

WARNING If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This

could lead to severe burns and damage to the vehicle. Before moving a seat, make sure there are no lighters in the moving part area of the vehicle. Before closing a storage compartment, make sure there are no lighters in the clos- ing area. Never leave a lighter inside a storage compartment or any other surface of the vehicle as it could ignite due to the high temperatures on such surfaces, particular- ly during the summer.

CAUTION Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob- jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat and cold could damage them or render them useless. Objects made from transparent materi- als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, magnifying glasses or transparent suction pads stuck to the windows can concentrate sunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 115 On the front passenger side: glove compartment.

This compartment can hold documents in A4 format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.

Opening and closing the glove compart- ment Opening: Pull the handle Fig. 115 and open the glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up- wards.

WARNING If the glove compartment is left open, the risk of causing severe injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu- vring increases. Always keep the glove compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion.

134

Transport and practical equipment

Object holder under front seats

Fig. 116 Storage compartment under the right front passenger seat.

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle and take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until it engages.

Depending on the equipment, under the driv- er's seat there may be a magazine holder (about the size of the instruction manual) in- stead of the storage compartment.

WARNING If the drawer is left open, it could prevent use of the pedals. This may cause serious accidents and injuries. Always keep the drawer closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer and any objects in it could fall into the driv- er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

CAUTION The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart- ments and supports in other parts of the vehi- cle:

In the centre console. Inside the central armrest. Other storage compartments are found in the rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats. There is a storage pocket on the rear of the front seats.

CAUTION Do not place overly large objects in the pockets on the front seat backrests (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp edges. Risk of damage to the pockets and the uphols- tery.

Drink holder

Introduction

Bottle holder The storage compartments of the driver and passenger doors contain a bottle holder.

WARNING Incorrect use of the bottle holders may cause injuries. Never put hot drinks in the drink holders. In the event of sudden braking or an acci- dent while driving, hot beverages in the bottle holders might spill and cause burns. Ensure that no bottles or other objects are dropped in the driver footwell while driving, as they could get under the pedals and obstruct their working. Never place glasses, food or other heavy objects drink holders. These heavy objects may be thrown across the cabin in the event of an accident and cause serious in- juries.

WARNING Closed bottles may explode inside the ve- hicle due to cold or heat. Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle if the temperature inside is very high or very low.

135

Operation

CAUTION Do not leave open cans in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may damage the vehicle and its electrical sys- tem.

Note The inside elements of the drink holders can be extracted for cleaning.

Front drink holders

Fig. 117 Front drink holders in the centre con- sole.

In the central console, next to the hand brake, there are two drinks holders Fig. 117.

Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 118 Front power socket.

Remove the plug from the socket located in the centre console Fig. 118. Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket.

The appliances connected to each power socket must not exceed a power rating of 120 Watt.

WARNING The power socket works only when the igni- tion is on. Improper use may cause serious injury or even fire. Children should there- fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if the button is also left behind. Otherwise

there is a possibility that they may be in- jured.

CAUTION Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a battery discharge. Should the connected appliance over- heat, immediately switch it off and discon- nect it from the socket. Before switching the ignition on or off, un- plug the appliances from the USB ports to protect them from any damage caused by fluctuations in voltage.

136

Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cooling

Introduction

Depending on the vehicles equipment, sever- al systems may have been fitted:

The heating and ventilation heats and ventilates the passenger compartment. It cannot cool. The manual air conditioning and the Cli- matronic cool and dehumidify the air. They operate most effectively with the windows and the sunroof closed.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.

Dust and pollen filter The dust and pollen filter with its activated charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against impurities in the air taken into the ve- hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changed regularly so that air conditioner performance is not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollu- tion, the filter must be changed more fre- quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNING Reduced visibility through the windows in- creases the risk of serious accidents. Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fog- ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev- erything outside. Only drive when you have good visibility. Always ensure that you use the air condi- tioning, heater or rear window heating to maintain good visibility to the outside. Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

WARNING Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly re- sulting in a serious accident.

Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.

CAUTION To replace the pollen filter, always visit a service centre. Switch the climate control or air condi- tioner off if you think it may be broken. This will avoid additional damage. Have the cli- mate control or air conditioning checked by a specialised workshop. Repairs to the climate control or air con- ditioning require specialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Note When the cooling system is turned off, air coming from the outside will not be dried. To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recommends leaving the cooling system (compressor) turned on. To do this, press the button. The button lamp should light up. The maximum heat output required to de- frost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to

137

Operation

ensure heating and cooling are not im- paired, and to prevent the windows from misting over. The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in the luggage compartment designed for this purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob- structing these slots with any kind of ob- ject.

Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air conditioning system leaves residue on the evaporator, producing a permanent un- pleasant odour. It is advisable to turn on the air condition- ing at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- crease in the cooling capacity is detected,

a Technical Service should be consulted to check the system. When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a moment.

Climatronic control

Fig. 119 In the centre console: Climatronic con- trols.

Automatic mode Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa- bled when the ventilation is modified manual- ly.

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool- ing system.

Temperature 1 / 2

The temperature of the right and left sides can be adjusted separately using the adjust- ers. The selected temperature is shown on the display of the climate control panel.

Synchronisation: press button so that settings on the driver's side apply to the pas- senger side. Use the temperature regulator

for the passenger side to set a different tem- perature.

Blower The power of the fan is automatically adjus- ted.

Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.

138

Air conditioning

Air distribution / / The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. It can also be manually distributed to the de- sired zone by pressing the corresponding button:

The airflow is directed towards the chest The airflow is directed towards the foot- well. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

Defrost/demist function The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di- rected at the windscreen and air recirculation

is automatically switched off. To defrost the windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi- fied at temperatures over approximately +3C (+38F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maxi- mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating conditions are re-establish- ed.

Air recirculation page 141

Seat heating page 142

Switching off Press button or manually set the fan to .

Manual air conditioning controls / Heating and fresh air system

Fig. 120 In the centre console: controls for the manual air conditioning; heating and fresh air system controls.

139

Operation

Cooling mode Manual air conditioning: Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Temperature 1

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Heating and fresh air system: The tempera- ture cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool or dehumidify the air.

Blower Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power.

At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioning are disconnected. Level 4 is the maximum.

Air distribution / / / / Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to the desired zone:

The airflow is directed towards the chest The airflow is directed towards the foot- well. The airflow is directed towards the wind- screen and the footwell area.

Defrost/demist function Manual air conditioning: When control 3 is in position the air flow is directed at the wind- screen and air recirculation is disconnected automatically or not activated. Increase the

fan power to clear the windscreen of con- densation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maxi- mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating conditions are re-establish- ed.

Air recirculation page 141

Seat heating page 142

Climate control usage instructions

The interior cooling system only works when the engine is running and fan is switched on.

Economic use of the air conditioning When the air conditioning is switched on, the compressor consumes engine power and has influence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quick- ly by opening the windows and the panoram- ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Change the temperature unit (Climatron- ic) The temperature display can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of the Infotainment system using the Infotain- ment button / > Settings > Units.

The cooling system cannot be activated If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on, this may be caused by the fol- lowing:

The engine is not running. The fan is switched off. The air conditioner fuse has blown. The outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +3C (+38F).

140

Air conditioning

The air conditioner compressor has been temporarily switched off because the engine coolant temperature is too high. Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a specialised work- shop.

Special characteristics If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak!

Note After starting the engine, any residual hu- midity in the air conditioner could mist over the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func- tion as soon as possible to clear the wind- screen of condensation.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must remain open.

To close the air vents on the left side, move the corresponding diffuser vent lever fully to the right. To close the air vents on the rights side, move the corresponding diffuser vent lever fully to the left.

Change the air direction using the ventila- tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable air vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in the rear area of the passenger compartment.

Note Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- sitive objects should never be placed in front of the air outlets as they may be dam- aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high, selecting manual air recirculation mode for a short period refreshes the vehicle interior more quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is switched off when the button is pressed or the air distributor is turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculation mode on and off Press the button to connect or discon- nect manual air recirculation.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Intro- duction on page 137. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, con- siderably limiting visibility. Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

CAUTION Do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on in vehicles with an air condi- tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the cooling system vaporiser and on the acti- vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen filter, leading to a permanently un- pleasant smell.

Note Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti- vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant odours from entering the vehicle interior when it is in reverse and while the automat- ic windscreen wiper is working.

Note If the temperature regulator is turned to the coldest setting (blue point), the air recircu- lation function and the button are auto- matically activated.

141

Operation

If the function is not deactivated by pressing the button, it will deactivate after approximately 20 minutes.

Seat heating

The seat cushions can be heated electrically when the ignition is switched on. The backrest is also heated in some versions.

Control seat heating Press buttons or on the control panel to turn on the seat heating as high as possi- ble. Press buttons or repeatedly to adjust it to the required level. To turn off the seat heating, press button or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

Cases in which the heat seating should not be switched on Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the following conditions are met:

The seat is not occupied. The seat has a cover. A child seat has been installed on the seat. The seat cushion is wet or damp. The outdoor or indoor temperature is great- er than +25C (77F).

WARNING People who cannot perceive pain or tem- perature because of medications, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a limited perception of these, may suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat heating. People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating. If an abnormality in the device's temper- ature control is detected, have it checked by a specialist workshop.

WARNING If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can adversely affect the operation of the seat heating, increasing the risk of burns. Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater. Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp. Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat. Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest.

Liquids, sharps objects and insulating materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces- sary fuel waste.

142

Introduction

Infotainment system

Introduction

First steps

Introduction

Infotainment functions and settings depend on the country and equipment

Before first use Before the first use, bear in mind the following points, to take full advantage of the functions and settings offered:

Observe the basic safety warnings page 143. Reset the Infotainment factory settings. Search and store favourite radio stations on the preset buttons so you can tune them quickly. Use only suitable audio sources and data media. Pair a mobile phone to use phone manage- ment through the Infotainment system. Use current maps for navigation. Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the cor- responding services.

Current documentation attached For using infotainment and its components, take into account, together with this instruc- tion manual, the following documentation:

Supplements to your vehicles on-board documentation. Instruction Manual of the mobile phone de- vice or audio sources. Operating instructions for data media and external players. Manuals for the Infotainment accessories subsequently installed or used additionally. Description of services when running SEAT CONNECT services.

Safety instructions

Some function areas may include links to third-party websites. SEAT, S.A. is not the owner of the third-party websites accessible through the links, and assumes no liability for their content.

Some function areas may include outside in- formation from third-party providers. SEAT, S.A. is not responsible for such information being correct, up-to-date or complete, or for ensuring it does not infringe the rights of third parties.

Radio stations and owners of data media and audio sources are responsible for the infor- mation they transmit.

Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains or due to the operation of other electrical devices, such as chargers, can also interfere with the reception of the ra- dio signal.

Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the antenna and on the window panes can inter- fere with radio reception.

WARNING The infotainment central computer is inter- connected with the control units mounted on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious danger of accident and injury if the central computer is repaired or disassembled and reassembled incorrectly. Never replace the central computer with another used, recycled or from another ve- hicle at the end of its useful life. The repair or disassembly and reassem- bly of the central computer should only be carried out at specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

WARNING The factory assembled radio with integra- ted software is interconnected with the control units mounted on the vehicle.

143

Infotainment system

Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci- dent and injury if the radio is repaired or disassembled and reassembled incorrect- ly. Never replace the radio with another ra- dio that is used, recycled or from another vehicle at the end of its useful life. The repair or disassembly and reassem- bly of the radio should only be carried out at specialised workshops. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

WARNING Any distraction affecting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause in- juries. Reading the information on the screen and managing the infotainment sys- tem can distract your attention from traffic and cause an accident. Always drive as carefully and responsibly as possible.

WARNING Connecting, inserting or removing an audio source or data media while driving can dis- tract your attention from the traffic and cause an accident.

WARNING Select volume settings that allow you to easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services si- rens). Hearing may be impaired if using too high a volume setting, even if only for short peri- ods of time.

WARNING The following circumstances may result in an emergency call, phone call or data transmission not being made or being inter- rupted: When in areas with zero or insufficient mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun- tains and valleys. When in areas with sufficient mobile phone or GPS signal, the telephony net- work of the telecommunications provider has interference or is not available. When the vehicle components necessary to make emergency calls, phone calls and to transmit data are damaged, do not work or do not have sufficient electrical power. When the battery of the mobile phone device is discharged or its charge level is insufficient.

WARNING In some countries and some telephone net- works it is only possible to make an emer- gency call, if a mobile telephone device is

connected to the telephone interface of the vehicle, inside it there is an unlocked SIM card with sufficient balance to make calls and with sufficient network signal coverage.

WARNING Read and observe the operating instruc- tions provided by the manufacturer in question when using mobile phone devices, data media, external devices, external au- dio and multimedia sources.

WARNING Position the connection cables of the audio sources and external devices so that they do not interfere with the driver.

WARNING When changing or connecting an audio or multimedia source may cause sudden changes in the volume. Lower the volume before connecting or switching to audio or multimedia sources.

WARNING If mobile phone and radiocommunication devices are used without connection to an external antenna, the maximum electro- magnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to the health of the driver and passengers.

144

Introduction

This is also the case if the external antenna has not been correctly installed. Keep a distance of at least 20 centime- tres between the antennas of the mobile phone device and an active medical de- vice, such as a pacemaker, as mobile phones might alter the functioning of these devices. Do not carry a mobile phone switched on very close or directly on top of an active medical device, for instance in a chest pocket. Immediately turn off the mobile phone if you suspect it is causing interferences in an active medical device or any other medical device.

WARNING Mobile phones, external devices and ac- cessories that are loose or not properly se- cured could move around the passenger compartment during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or an accident and cause damage or injury. Set mobile phone devices, external devi- ces and their accessories outside the air- bag deployment areas or store them se- curely.

WARNING The centre armrest may obstruct the driv- er's arm movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries. Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING If the light conditions are not good and the screen is damaged or dirty, the indications and information displayed on the screen may not be read or be read incorrectly. The indications and information dis- played on the screen should never induce to take any risk that compromises safety. The screen is not a replacement for driver awareness.

WARNING Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz- ard announcements. The following condi- tions prevent such notices from being re- ceived or issued: When in areas with zero or insufficient ra- dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, un- derpasses, mountains and valleys. When the frequency bands of the radio station have interference or are not availa- ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re- ception.

When the speakers and the vehicle com- ponents necessary for radio reception are damaged, do not work or do not have suffi- cient electrical power. When the infotainment is switched off.

WARNING Switch off mobile phone devices in areas with a risk of explosion!

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the navigation system may differ from the current traffic situation. Traffic signs, signalling systems, traffic regulations and local circumstances pre- vail over driving recommendations and navigation system indications. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Certain circumstances can significantly initially planned lengthen both the duration of the trip and the route to the destination, or even temporarily prevent navigation to it, for example, if a road is closed to traffic.

Note In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile phones is forbidden, the mobile device in question must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by

145

Infotainment system

a mobile phone device when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.

Note If the playback volume is excessive or dis- torted, the speakers may be damaged.

146

Introduction

Overview and controls

Connect System

Fig. 121 Overview of the controls

Touch screen. The infotainment functions can be used through the screen. Navigation Menu page 176 Full Link menu page 160

1

2

3

Turn volume up Turn volume down Turn the infotainment on/off

4

5

6

HOME button. : main menu with widget views. : main menu in mosaic mode.

7

147

Infotainment system

Media System

Fig. 122 Overview: control unit and indication in the 8.25-inch version

Touch screen. The infotainment functions can be used through the screen. Rotary push button (to adjust the volume and to switch the infotainment on/off) Rotary push button (to search and select) HOME button (to open the home page) Radio/Multimedia page 169 Telephone page 183 Full Link page 160 Vehicle information page 91

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Vehicle settings page 929

148

Introduction

General instructions for use

Operating indications

The infotainment needs a few seconds for the complete start-up of the system and dur- ing that time it does not react to inputs. Only the image of the rear view camera system can be displayed during system start-up. The display of all indications and the exe- cution of functions only takes place once the infotainment system has finished booting. The duration of the system booting depends on the number of infotainment functions and may take longer than normal in the event of very high or very low temperatures. When using the infotainment system and corresponding accessories, e.g., head- phones, bear in mind country-specific regu- lations and legal provisions. Some functions of the infotainment system require an active SEAT CONNECT user ac- count and an Internet connection for the ve- hicle. The data transmission must not be limi- ted to perform the functions. To use the infotainment system, simply lightly press a button or touch the screen. For the correct operation of the infotain- ment system it is important that it is switched on and that, if necessary, the time and date of the vehicle are set correctly.

If a function button is missing on the screen, it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the specific equipment of the country or ver- sion. Some infotainment functions can only be selected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In some countries, the selector lever must also be in the parking position P or in neutral posi- tion N. It is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance with legal provisions. Restrictions on the use of devices using Bluetooth technology may apply in some countries. For further information, contact the local authorities. If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turn on the ignition before restarting the infotain- ment system. If the setup is changed, this may change the display on the screen and in some cases, the infotainment system may behave in a manner different to that described in this in- struction manual. Ensure that any repairs or modifications that need to be carried out on the infotain- ment system are carried out by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Using a mobile phone device inside the ve- hicle may cause noise in the speakers. In some countries, the infotainment system automatically shuts off when the engine is

switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt battery charge level is low. On vehicles with park assist, the audio source volume is automatically lowered when reverse gear is selected, as well as when the doors are opened. The volume reduction can be adjusted. Information about the included software and the license conditions can be found in Settings > Copyright. When selling or lending the vehicle, make sure that all saved data, files and settings have been deleted and, if necessary, external audio sources and data media have been re- moved.

Note You will find more information and tips for using the infotainment system in the Help menu.

HOME screen

In the control and display unit you can set up the views and representation on the home screen or use the factory setting templates.

If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the specific equipment of the country or version.

The following menus can be included as an icon on the home screen:

149

Infotainment system

Main menus on the home screen Navigation page 176

Radio page 169, Multimedia page 173 Telephone page 183

Full Link page 160

Setup page 151

Vehicle page 92

Data page 91

Air conditioning page 137

Sound

Users

Store

Legal

Help

Managing the infotainment system

Execute the functions and settings with the in- fotainment controls.

Depending on the equipment, the infotain- ment system has different controls: Touch screen. Touch zones outside the screen, for exam- ple, Volume (+ -). Function buttons, for example, RADIO or MEDIA.

Help Menu This menu displays information on the opera- tion of the infotainment system and gives practical tips.

Press Help.

Connecting and disconnecting the info- tainment system The infotainment system turns on when the ignition is switched on, unless it has been manually turned off beforehand.

The infotainment system starts-up with the last set volume, provided that this does not exceed the preset maximum start-up volume.

The infotainment system automatically turns off when the driver's door is opened, provided the ignition has been switched off before- hand.

Moving objects and adjusting volume Move objects on the screen to adapt settings, for example, with scrollable buttons or to move the areas of a menu.

Depending on the equipment, menus and displays can be customised.

Increasing and reducing images or map sizes Tip: use your thumb and index finger. Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and leave them on the screen. To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin- ger from the other. To reduce views, slowly bring one finger towards the other.

Note If you turn on the infotainment system man- ually with the ignition off, it will automati- cally turn off after about 30 minutes.

Customising the infotainment sys- tem

Customise the menus and infotainment views to quickly access your favourite or most fre- quently used functions.

The main menu contains function buttons for accessing all of the Infotainment apps.

150

Introduction

Customise shortcuts At the bottom of the screen you will find shortcuts to customisable system functions. Use the settings to delete or replace them, or change their order.

Press and hold one of the icons (or press + of an empty position) to display an additional window. Select one of the icons from the apps bar. Press to delete an icon. Click on an icon in the additional window to replace the value. Hold your finger on one of the icons and drag it to the desired position. To close the edit more, press in the addi- tional window, or press .

Note The shortcut bar cannot be edited when the vehicle is moving.

Settings (system and sound)

The selection of possible settings varies de- pending on the country, the equipment in question and the equipment of the vehicle.

Modifying settings The meaning of the following symbols are valid for all system and sound settings.

All changes are automatically applied when the menus are closed.

Symbol and its meaning

/ The setting is selected and activated or connected.

/ The setting is not selected, disabled or disconnected.

To open a drop-down list.

To increase a setting value.

To increase a setting value.

To go back step by step.

To go forward step by step.

To change a setting value with the scrollable button without adjusting.

Sound settings Accessing the sound settings: press Sound

In the sound settings there may be the follow- ing functions, information and setting options:

Equaliser. Position. Settings.

System settings Accessing the system settings: press Set- tings.

In the system settings there may be the fol- lowing functions, information and setting op- tions:

Screen. Time and date. Language. Additional keypad languages. Units. Voice control. Wi-Fi. Data connection. Manage mobile devices. Reset factory settings. System information. Copyright. Configuration wizard.

Adjust the volume of external audio sour- ces If you need to increase the playback volume for the external audio source, first lower the volume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audio source is very low, increase the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not

151

Infotainment system

enough, change the input volume to medi- um or high.

If the sound from the connected external au- dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input vol- ume to medium or low.

Clean the screen

Remove persistent dirt carefully and without using aggressive cleaning products. To clean the screen we recommend that:

The infotainment system is switched off. Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa- ter page 301. In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by moistening with a little water. Then carefully remove with a clean, soft cloth.

CAUTION Cleaning the screen with inappropriate cleaning products or when dry, may dam- age it. When cleaning, only press lightly. Do not use aggressive cleaning products or that contain solvents. Such products

may damage the equipment and darken the screen.

Trademarks, licenses and copy- rights

Registered trademarks and licenses Certain terms in this manual bear the symbol or . These symbols indicate that it is a trademark or a registered trademark. The ab- sence of this symbol, however, does not nec- essarily mean that the term in question can be used freely.

Other product names are registered trade- marks or trademarks of the respective rights holders.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Android Auto is a trademark of Google Inc. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.iPod, iPad and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. MirrorLink and MirrorLink Logo are certi- fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor- tium LLC. Windows is a registered trademark of Mi- crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA. MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. This product is protected by certain Micro- soft Corporation industrial and intellectual property rights. The use or commercialization of technology of this type outside the config- uration of this product, without a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft branch is prohibited.

Copyright As a general rule, audio and video files stored on data media and audio sources are subject to intellectual property protection in accord- ance with the national and international pro- visions applicable in each case. Please bear in mind all legal provisions!

152

Introduction

Technical data

Radio with integrated hardware (8.25 ")1)

The factory-mounted radio in the vehicle with integrated hardware includes country-specif- ic components and software for connectivity and for the execution of vehicle, comfort and infotainment functions.

The corresponding indications are shown on the radio screen and partly on the instrument panel. Capacitive colour screen: 8.25 inch version, TFT, WVGA: 1082 x 480

pixels. Touch operation via the device screen, ro-

tary push-button, menu button and buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Central computer with control and display unit (9.2")2)

The factory-mounted central computer in the vehicle includes country-specific compo- nents and software for connectivity and for the execution of vehicle, comfort and infotain- ment functions.

The corresponding indications are shown on the control and display unit screen and partly on the instrument panel. Capacitive colour screen: Using the equipment with: Touch zones Touch operation. Buttons on the multifunction steering

wheel. Approach sensors (driver and passenger

side recognition, gesture control).

Vehicle and comfort functions Driver assistance system settings. Heating and air conditioning settings. Lights and visibility function settings. Vehicle comfort settings. Parking and manoeuvring settings.

Sound system

Basic equipment: The infotainment system that is supplied from the factory is equipped as follows: Speakers in different locations and with dif-

ferent power levels (watts). Internal amplifier depending on the system:

4 speakers: 2 x 20 W 6 speakers: 4x 20 W

Setting options: Equaliser, depending on the system: 4 speakers: treble, mid and bass. 6 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre-

defined settings. Sound distribution, depending on the sys-

tem: 4 speakers: Balance (left / right) 6 speakers: Balance + Fader (left /

right / front / rear). Sound optimisation by zones (valid for the

6-speaker system): Manual (Driver and All) Automatic depending on the seats oc-

cupied.

Optional sound system The infotainment system can be extended with an optional sound system as follows: 7 speakers in different locations and with

different power levels (watts). 300W external amplifier (Ethernet or CAN,

depending on the infotainment system), which processes the audio signals sent by the central computer.

1) Equipment name: Media System 2) Equipment name: Connect System.

153

Infotainment system

Excitation of speaker channels through class AB final stages.

Audio signal processing in digital internal signal processor (DSP).

Independent subwoofer in the luggage compartment.

Setting options: User equaliser: 5 bands. Sound distribution: Balance + Fader (left /

right / front / rear). Sound optimisation by zones: Manual (Driver, Front and All)

Subwoofer volume.

Connectivity

Wi-Fi Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz transfer (depending on

the country) Apple CarPlay and Android Auto over Wi-Fi. Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fi

devices. Media System: 5GHz access point for Full Link Wireless

only Connect System: Access point Tethering

Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR code

Bluetooth profiles There can be a maximum of two mobile devi- ces connected to the Bluetooth hands-free and a third device connected to the Blue- tooth as a music player.

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel- ephone management system, a data ex- change takes place via one of the Bluetooth profiles.

Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the HFP can be used to manage calls through the infotainment system. Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It may require connecting other profiles for managing and controlling playback. Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows phone book contents to be downloaded from the mobile telephone. Message profile (MAP): It allows short messages (SMS) and emails to be downloa- ded and synchronised.

154

Data transfer

Data transfer

SEAT CONNECT

Introduction

To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be activa- ted online by entering into a SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A. and is subject to a temporary use limitation depending on the country.

Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfolios offered by SEAT and individual services can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reacti- vated, renamed and extended, even without prior notification.

In https://my.seat you can create the user account, see the description of services and more information.

The execution and availability of the SEAT CONNECT services and service portfolios may vary depending on the country, as well as the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi- ty.

Connectivity statuses

(white) Full connectivity, all services active

(grey) Limited connectivity, some services may not be available.

no icon No connectivity, no services availa- ble.

SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition or search technology does not recognise or offer re- sults for all words.

There are SEAT CONNECT services for which registration is mandatory and others for which it is not mandatory.

Description of services Before running SEAT CONNECT services, read and take into account the description of the corresponding services. Descriptions are updated non-periodically and are available online at https://my.seat.

Always use the most up-to-date version of the corresponding service description.

WARNING In areas with insufficient mobile phone and GPS coverage, neither emergency calls or phone calls can be made, and data cannot be transmitted. Change location if possi- ble.

CAUTION The vehicle may be damaged by factors outside the control of SEAT, S.A. These damaged can include: Misuse of mobile terminals Data loss during transmission. Unsuitable or defective third party appli- cations. Malicious software on data storage devi- ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones.

Services portfolio

The initial service allocation shown here cor- responds to the third generation of SEAT CONNECT services and represents the maxi- mum services portfolio. The maximum possi- ble portfolio is only available on some vehicle models. During the useful life of the vehicle, you can change the assignment shown here.

After activating the services management in the infotainment system you can check if the vehicle has services and what they are.

In some countries and in the event of a con- tract renewal, the services offered may be combined differently than indicated here. They may also vary depending on the year of production of the vehicle. The services men- tioned correspond to the third generation of SEAT CONNECT.

155

Infotainment system

SEAT CONNECT services and functions that do not require activation The following services also work without the activation of SEAT CONNECT:

Public emergency call service. Privacy mode. Legal.

SEAT CONNECT services The SEAT CONNECT services are: Private emergency call Public emergency call Roadside assistance call Customer support Service appointment planning Online system update Customisation Activating SEAT CONNECT Private mode (deactivation of services) Delete user / Reset factory settings Remote independent heating Remote opening Horn and turn signals Vehicle status incl. doors and lights Driving data Vehicle status report Anti-theft alarm warning

Zone warning Speed warning Online map update Search for points of interest Petrol stations Online traffic information Parking lots Online infotainment system update Online route calculation Information on risks Dictation Natural voice control for destinations and addresses Online radio Online media Online route import Online destination import Remote auxiliary ventilation Parking position Privacy mode Legal

SEAT CONNECT services for hybrid vehi- cles Available only in electric and hybrid vehicles.

Remote air conditioning Electrical power manager

Departure times plus all SEAT CONNECT services in the pre- vious section page 156.

SEAT CONNECT individual options In-Car Applications. These applications can be purchased and installed directly in the infotainment system through the In-Car store. Full Link. Data package. Pay per use data rates for the use of online functions, for example, 2 GB per month.

Note The public emergency call service is available regardless of whether the info- tainment system is logged in. Customisation and purchase of In-Car applications require logging into infotain- ment system, but the activation of the vehi- cle in a SEAT CONNECT account is not nec- essary.

Activation of SEAT CONNECT and S- PIN

Activating SEAT CONNECT The following steps are necessary for the ac- tivation of SEAT CONNECT (including regis- tration):

156

Data transfer

Create a user account at https://my.seat or directly through the infotainment system in the User Management menu. Place the SEAT CONNECT order and acti- vate it. Add the vehicle to your user account. Prove ownership. Prove your identity. It is only necessary if you are to run SEAT CONNECT services rele- vant to security. You can activate it at https://my.seat or di- rectly through the infotainment system. To activate it through the infotainment system, proceed as follows:

HOME > Manage users > Become pri- mary user.

MENU > Settings > SEAT Connect > Settings

Follow the rest of the indications and the in- formation shown in the infotainment system. During activation, you may be asked to cre- ate an S-PIN.

Update option

9.2 Infotainment yes

8.25 Infotainment yes

SEAT CONNECT portal yes

SEAT CONNECT application yes

9.2"

8.25"

More information at https://my.seat/faqs.

S-PIN The S-PIN is a sequence of several digits, which can be selected when completed the SEAT CONNECT registration.

When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to- guess number sequences and known dates of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the SEAT CONNECT user account in Account set- tings.

The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro- tect your user profile or to run a SEAT CON- NECT service relevant to the security of your vehicle.

You must manage this S-PIN with absolute confidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to third parties, for security reasons you must change it immediately.

Ownership and identity accredita- tion

Depending on the Infotainment system, the ownership accreditation method will be the 2-key method or the registration code meth- od.

9.2 Infotainment system To become a main user and thus prove own- ership of the vehicle, you need both of the ve- hicles physical keys. Ownership accredita- tion takes place in the vehicle during registra- tion or, if you already have a SEAT CONNECT user account, you must log in through the in- fotainment system and then go to Manage users

Switch on the ignition and the infotainment system. In the infotainment system, register in SEAT CONNECT. Or: open the menu Manage users > Set- tings > Become primary user and follow the instructions. Press the unlock button on the first vehicle key. Press the unlock button on the second vehi- cle key.

8.25 Infotainment system To become the main user and therefore ac- credit ownership of the vehicle, you will need the registration code found on the SEAT Web Portal and in the APP after linking the vehicle to your account (My Garage > Add Vehicle > Accept terms and conditions and SEAT privacy policy). Ownership is accredited in- side the vehicle. Go to Vehicle settings > SEAT CONNECT > Registration and enter

157

Infotainment system

the registration code shown on the Web Por- tal or in the App.

Once the infotainment system has processed the orders by radiofrequency, the accredita- tion of the ownership will have been comple- ted. You can control the current status in the SEAT CONNECT portal.

How is ownership accredited?

9.2 Infotainment 2-Key method.

8.25 Infotainment Registration code

SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible

SEAT CONNECT appli- cation

No, it is not possible

Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident) Identity accreditation must be done before you can use SEAT CONNECT services that are relevant to security, such as the Remote Opening service. Identity accreditation can be done in two ways:

In person at the SEAT dealership. You can find more information about SEAT Ident on the SEAT CONNECT portal at https://my.seat.

Legal provisions

During the use of SEAT CONNECT services, information is transferred and processed on- line through the vehicle. Such data can also provide (at least indirectly) information about the driver in question, for example, driving be- haviour and location. As a contracting party in the SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A., you must ensure that when your vehicle is used by other drivers (for example, family or friends), data protection and personal rights are respected. Therefore, you must inform drivers in advance that the vehicle transfers and receives data online, and that you can access such data.

Not taking into account this obligation to in- form, can infringe certain rights of the occu- pants.

Users can manage data sending and trans- fers through the privacy mode at any time. More information at: https://my.seat/faq.

Follow-up services: ask all occupants The follow-up services need geographical and vehicle data to determine whether the vehicle is being used within defined speed ranges, where it has been parked or if it is be- ing used in an established geographical area. This information is displayed on the SEAT CONNECT portal and in the SEAT CONNECT app.

Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehi- cle occupants if they agree with the activa- ted services. If they do not, deactivate the service in question (if possible) or do not al- low the occupants to use the vehicle.

GPS tracking: marking If the vehicle has a factory-assembled con- trol unit that transmits the its current geo- graphical position and speed, the vehicle usually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the roof console). The absence of the marking on the vehicle does not guarantee that the control unit does not transmit the vehicles current geographical position and speed.

Personal information SEAT protects your personal data and only uses them, as long as the law allows it or you have given your consent on the occasion of a use. You will find detailed information on data processing in relation to SEAT CONNECT services in the Privacy Policy, which you can access in its corresponding current version on the SEAT website.

Permanent transfer of the vehicle If another person has left you the vehicle for permanent use (for example, if you buy a used vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may already be activated and the previous user still has

158

Data transfer

the possibility of accessing the data regis- tered through SEAT CONNECT and control certain functions of your vehicle.

In the infotainment system you can check if your vehicle is assigned to a person as the main user. In this case, you can register your- self as the main user of the vehicle and thus automatically delete the previous main user. Alternatively, through the infotainment sys- tem you can directly and permanently delete the previous user as the main user, as well as put the vehicle in offline mode and thus limit both the communication of your vehicle with the SEAT, S.A. data server and the processing of personal and vehicle data.

Deactivating SEAT CONNECT serv- ices

The following functions are available in the infotainment system to deactivate and acti- vate SEAT CONNECT services:

Central deactivation or activation Individual deactivation or activation

You can rerun the corresponding services af- ter cancelling their deactivation in the info- tainment system.

Note The services required by law and their data transmission, such as the public emergen- cy call system, cannot be disconnected or deactivated.

Faults

Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEAT CONNECT services are met, there may be factors beyond the control of SEAT, S.A. that interfere with the execution of such services or prevent them. These may be specifically:

Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software update and technical expansion of telecom- munication equipment, satellites, servers and data banks. Change of the mobile telephony standard for the transmission of mobile data by the tel- ecommunications service provider, for exam- ple, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS. Disconnection of an existing mobile phone standard by the telecommunications service provider. Interference, disturbance or interruption in the reception of the mobile phone and GPS signal due to aspects such as high-speed driving, solar storms, meteorological influen- ces, topography, blocking equipment and the intensive use of mobile phones in the radio cells in question.

When in areas with zero or insufficient mo- bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam- ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun- tains and valleys. External information from third party sup- plies available with limitations, incomplete or incorrect, e.g. representations of maps. Countries and regions where SEAT CON- NECT is not offered.

Service management

Open the settings in Users and go to Privacy settings and services. In vehicles equipped with the 9.2 Infotainment, it is accessed from Users > Settings > Private Mode (deactiva- tion of services). In vehicles equipped with the 8.25 Infotainment it is accessed from Settings > SEAT Connect > Privacy set- tings and services. You can do the following in the infotainment system:

Check which SEAT CONNECT services are currently available in the vehicle. The number of SEAT CONNECT services that are enabled or disabled. Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECT services.

More information at https://my.seat.

159

Infotainment system

Privacy and Services Settings SEAT CONNECT services can be activated and deactivated individually. To do this, just check the box corresponding to the service you want to activate or deactivate. Use the privacy mode option if you want to deacti- vate all of the services at the same time.

Privacy mode Allows you to deactivate or activate the serv- ices depending on the selected privacy level.

Tracking

Share location. Main users and co- users can view position data on the SEAT CONNECT portal or app.

Location

Use location. Position, vehicle, and user data are used for services.

Personal

No location. Only the vehicle data and user data are used for services.

Incognito

Maximum privacy. Your services are disabled. Only services required for legal reasons use data.

Setting options are not available in all mar- kets or in all vehicle models.

Note If you deactivate each and every SEAT CONNECT service, the OCU may continue to transmit data.

Full Link

Introduction

With Full Link it is possible to view and use the contents and functions that are shown on the mobile phone device on the infotainment screen.

To do this, the mobile phone device must be connected with the infotainment system through a USB interface.

Some technologies can also be used by Wireless Full Link through the Bluetooth in- terface and a Wi-Fi connection.

The following technologies may be availa- ble: Apple CarPlay Android Auto MirrorLink

The availability of the technologies that Full Link includes depends on the country and the mobile phone device used.

You will find more information on the SEAT website (www.seat.com).

Access the Full Link main menu Browsing the Full Link main menu depends on the infotainment system used.

Click on Full Link.

Configure Wireless Full Link In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must first pair the mobile phone device with the info- tainment system. To do this, proceed as fol- lows:

Connect a mobile phone device for the first time. Unlock the mobile phone device. Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth on the mobile phone device. Connect the mobile phone device to the in- fotainment system using a USB cable or via Bluetooth. Access the Full Link main menu, unless it appears automatically. Select the mobile phone device and the technology you want. Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo- bile phone device to grant the necessary au- thorisations to the infotainment system. Disconnect the USB connection and con- nect with the infotainment system again via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth. Wireless Full Link is now configured.

The pairing has concluded. The connected mobile phone device can also use Wireless Full Link from now on without the USB con- nection.

160

Data transfer

If pop-up menus are rejected during the con- nection process, Wireless Full Link will not be available. In this case, SEAT recommends de- leting the devices in both the telephone set- tings and the infotainment system, and re- starting the connection process.

WARNING The use of applications while driving can distract your attention from the traffic. Any distraction affecting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Always drive as carefully and responsibly as possible.

WARNING Any applications that are not suitable or execute incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. Protect the mobile phone device and its applications from inappropriate use. Never carry out modifications to the ap- plications. Follow instructions in the instruction manual for the mobile phone device.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor quality or are defective, the inadequate program- ming of the applications, the insufficient

coverage of the network, the loss of data during transmission or the improper use of mobile phone devices.

Note Wireless Full Link may not be compatible with all technologies. Wireless Full Link (Android Auto and Ap- ple CarPlay ) is disabled in countries whose radio frequency regulations do not allow it to operate.

Applications (apps)

With SEAT Full Link, the display of the con- tents of SEAT applications and other provid- ers installed on mobile phone devices can be transferred to the infotainment screen.

In the case of third-party applications, there may be compatibility problems.

Applications, their use and the necessary mobile phone connection may be pay per use.

The offer of applications can be varied and designed for a vehicle or a specific country. The content and volume of applications, as well as the companies that offer them, may vary. Some applications also depend on the availability of third-party services.

It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica- tions offered will work on all mobile phone devices or with all their operating systems.

The applications offered by SEAT can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated and extended without prior notification.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving, only certified applications can be used.

Full Link symbols and settings

To show more information To open the Full Link settings menu To select Apple CarPlay technology. To select Android Auto technology. To select MirrorLink technology.

Apple CarPlay

In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following requirements must be met: The iPhone must be compatible with Ap- ple CarPlay. Voice control (Siri ) must be active on the iPhone. Apple CarPlay must be active without limitations in the iPhone settings.

161

Infotainment system

The iPhone must be connected to the in- fotainment system via a USB connection. On- ly USB connections with data transmission are suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay. The USB cable used must be an original Apple cable.

Apple CarPlay Wireless: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone.

Establish connection When you first connect an iPhone, follow the instructions on the infotainment system screen and on the iPhone .

The requirements must be met to use Apple CarPlay.

Launch Apple CarPlay: Press Full Link to access the Full Link main menu. Press Apple CarPlay to establish a con- nection with the iPhone.

Disconnecting On the Apple CarPlay mode, press the SEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection.

The representation of function buttons on the screen may vary.

Special characteristics During an active Apple CarPlay connection, the following characteristics are applicable: Bluetooth connections between the iPhone and the infotainment system are not possible. If there is an active Bluetooth connection, it is automatically interrupted. The phone functions are only available through Apple CarPlay. The functions de- scribed for the Infotainment system are not available. The connected iPhone cannot be used as a multimedia device in the Media main menu. It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- tion system and the Apple CarPlay naviga- tion system at the same time. The last route started interrupts the one that was previously active. Depending on the infotainment system you use, on the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone and Media mode. With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control Press briefly to start voice control using the infotainment system.

Press this button for a long time to start voice control (Siri) of the connected iPhone.

Note The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary. You will find information about technical requirements, compatible iPhones, certi- fied applications and their availability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple Car- Play websites, or at SEAT dealerships.

Android Auto

Requirements for Android Auto In order to use Android Auto, the following requirements must be met: The mobile phone device, called smart- phone from here on, has to be compatible with Android Auto. The smartphone must have an Android Au- to application installed. The smartphone has to be connected through the USB connection with data trans- mission with the infotainment system. The USB cable used must be an original ca- ble provided by the smartphone manufactur- er.

162

Data transfer

Android Auto Wireless: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi also have to be activated on the device.

Establish connection When you first connect a smartphone, follow the instructions on the infotainment system screen and on the smartphone.

The requirements must be met to use Android Auto.

Launch Android Auto: Press Full Link to access the Full link main menu Press Android Auto to establish a connec- tion with the smartphone.

Disconnecting In Android Auto mode, press the Exit/SEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristics During an active Android Auto connection, the following characteristics are applicable: An active Android Auto device can be connected at the same time via Bluetooth (HFP profile) with the infotainment system. It is possible to use the phones functions through Android Auto. If the Android Auto device is connected at the same time via Bluetooth with the infotainment system, the

telephone function of the infotainment can also be used. An active Android Auto device cannot be used as a multimedia device in the Media main menu. It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- tion system and the Android Auto navigation system at the same time. The last route star- ted interrupts the one that was previously ac- tive. On the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone and Media mode. With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control Press briefly to start voice control using the infotainment system. Press and hold this button to start voice control (Google Assistant) on the connected smartphone.

Note The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary. You will find information about technical requirements, compatible mobile phone devices, certified applications and their availability on the SEAT (www.seat.com)

and Android Auto websites, or at SEAT dealerships.

MirrorLink

Requirements for MirrorLink In order to use MirrorLink, the following re- quirements must be met: The mobile device must be compatible with MirrorLink. The mobile phone device must be connec- ted to the infotainment system via a USB con- nection that is suitable for data transmission. The USB cable used must be an original ca- ble provided by the mobile phone device manufacturer. Depending on the mobile phone device used, a Car-Mode application that is suitable for using MirrorLink must be installed.

Establish connection When you first connect a mobile phone de- vice, follow the instructions on the infotain- ment system screen and on the mobile phone device.

The requirements must be met to use Mirror- Link.

163

Infotainment system

Launch MirrorLink: Press Full Link to access the Full Link main menu. Press to establish the connection with the mobile phone device.

Disconnecting In the MirrorLink mode, press the APP icon to access the Full Link main menu. OR: press to access the MirrorLink main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristics During an active MirrorLink connection, the following characteristics are applicable: An active MirrorLink device can be con- nected to the infotainment system at the same time via Bluetooth. If the MirrorLink device is connected to the infotainment system via Bluetooth, the tele- phone function of the infotainment system can be used. You cannot use an active MirrorLink de- vice as a multimedia device in the Media main menu. On the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone mode. The instrument panel screen does not dis- play any indication to turn or the Media mode.

With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

Function buttons Function buttons and their function:

Return the Full Link main menu. Here you can end the MirrorLink connection, connect another mobile phone device or select another technology. Press to close the open apps. Then press the apps to be closed or the Close all function button to close all the open ap- plications. Press to display the mobile phone device screen on the infotainment system screen. To open the MirrorLink settings. Press to return to the MirrorLink main menu.

Note You will find information about technical re- quirements, compatible mobile phone de- vices, certified applications and their avail- ability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and MirrorLink websites, or at SEAT dealer- ships.

APP

WLAN access point

Introduction 3 Not available for model: Media System

The infotainment system can be used to share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi- ces page 165, Configuration for sharing a connection over WLAN.

The infotainment system can also use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro- vide Internet to the devices connected to the hotspot (WLAN client) page 165.

Note Data transmission may incur charges. Due to the high volume of data exchanged, SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar- iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op- erators can provide the relevant informa- tion. The exchange of data packages may generate additional costs, depending on your mobile phone rate, particularly if you are abroad (for example, roaming rates).

164

Data transfer

Configuration for sharing a con- nection over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Press the Settings button. Activate the wireless network. To do this, press the function button Wi-Fi > Infotain- ment system as hotspot. Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the device that is to be connected. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers instruction man- ual. Activate the mobile device assignment in the infotainment system. To do this, press the function button Enable as hotspot and check the checkbox. Enter and confirm the network key dis- played on the device.

The following adjustments can also be made in the Infotainment system as hotspot menu:

Security level: WPA2 encryption automati- cally generates a network key. Network key: Network key automatically generated. Press the function button to man- ually change the network key. The network key must have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63.

SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32 characters).

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

There is also the option of scanning the QR code by connecting the device directly to the infotainment systems Wi-Fi network without having to enter the password: select Settings > Wi-Fi > Quick connection to infotainment system.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) 3 This depends on the equipment and the coun- try in question.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create a ciphered local wireless network quickly and simply.

Establish the connection with the wireless network (WLAN). Press the WPS button on the WLAN router until the warning light on the router starts flashing. If the WLAN router does not support WPS the network must be configured man- ually. OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router starts flashing.

Press the WPS button on the WLAN device. The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Configure Internet access

The infotainment system can use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to establish an Internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Activate and check the wireless hotspot on the external device. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers instruction manual. Press the Settings button; OR access the Media and press the Settings menu. Press the Wi-Fi > Connect to Wi-Fi menu and put a check in the checkbox. Press the Search for Wi-Fi button and se- lect the device you want from the list. If necessary, enter the network key of the device in the infotainment system and con- firm with OK.

Manual settings: To manually enter the network settings of an external (WLAN) device.

165

Infotainment system

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.

Note Due to the large number of devices on the market, it is not possible to guarantee fault- free operation of all functions.

166

Infotainment operation

Infotainment operation

voice control

Introduction

Voice control works both online and offline. In online mode, commands are recorded more accurately, as more data is available.

Voice control understands questions and ex- pressions without having to learn commands. Commands can be formulated freely and can be colloquial. You will find proposals for commands in the infotainment system.

Functions are reduced in offline mode.

Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can cause malfunctions, as well as confusing phrases and answers.

Languages available depending on the market Online and offline: German, American Eng- lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanish and Czech. These languages have advanced functions such as Online Commands, natural interaction, etc.

The other languages of the infotainment sys- tem do not offer Online Commands, air con- ditioning control or natural interaction.

Requirements Online and offline: voice control with the corresponding infotainment installed in the vehicle. Online current SEAT CONNECT Plus con- tract active.

Note Voice control only recognises commands in the language that is set in the infotain- ment system. Test the voice control with the vehicle stopped before starting to move to famili- arise yourself with its operation. Additional information and examples can be found in the menu Help > Voice con- trol

Activation word and commands

Voice control activation words If you have connected the voice control via the wake word, the connected infotainment responds with How can I help you?. It then scans the words spoken in the vehicle after the activation word.

Voice control starts when the infotainment recognises the activation word.

Connect and disconnect the activation word Press Settings > Voice control > Acti- vate/deactivate wake word.

Activation word: Hola Hola

Commands For voice control to recognise commands re- liably, bear in mind the following tips for the commands to work properly:

Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands are not recognised. Speak in a normal tone of voice. Speak a little louder if you are driving at high speed. Avoid outside noises. Open windows and doors can interfere with voice control. Avoid other secondary noises, such as con- versations in the vehicle. Do not direct the air flow from the outlets towards the microphone or the interior lining of the roof. Do not use a very strong accent or dialec- tal. Do not make long pauses.

Voice control is active and recognises the words pronounced.

Note When the activation word is disconnec- ted, the infotainment system cannot be

167

Infotainment system

activated by means of the activation word. Voice control is still available via the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Availability depends on the country and equipment. Depending on the content of the phone book and to ensure reliable recognition of the names of the phone book, it may be useful to change the order of the first and last name of the contact in question.

Start and stop voice control

Depending on the equipment, you can start voice control in different ways.

Start voice control Voice control activation: say the word that activates voice control. Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice control button .

The voice control ends automatically, if you use infotainment functions, if the parking sys- tem is activated or by incoming calls.

In some cases you can also start voice con- trol of the connected mobile phone device, by pressing and holding the voice control button.

Manually ending voice control Voice control can be cancelled with the Can- cel command.

Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice control button twice in a row, or a long press.

168

Infotainment operation

Radio mode

Introduction

Fig. 123 Schematic representation: Radio view

In Radio mode you can tune in the available radio stations in different frequency bands and memorise your favourites on the preset buttons to access them quickly.

The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country. In certain countries, frequency bands may stop broadcasting or not be available again.

Access the RADIO menu Press HOME > Fig. 123.

Access the settings Press HOME > > .

Online functions in Radio mode Online functions in Radio mode are only available under the following conditions:

SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plus equipment. You have an active SEAT CONNECT user account. Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac- count.

You have a corresponding data package acquired from the In-Car store or have a data volume for your own mobile phone device via Wi-Fi access point.

Note For streaming services you need to have an account with the provider in question. Radio stations are responsible for the content of the information they transmit. Additional electrical equipment connected to the vehicle can cause interference in the reception of the radio signal and noise in the speakers.

169

Infotainment system

Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehi- cles with a window aerial.

Radio equipment and symbols

The functions, as well as the types of recep- tion and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country.

AM tuner. Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna). Summarised FM station list. Fusion of DAB and FM stations into one list. Fusion of all stations stored in preset but- tons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta- tions. Station logos. DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that are emitted sequentially. Internet radio.

Universal symbols in Radio mode To select the desired AM frequency band.

To select the desired FM/DAB fre- quency band.

To select the type of Internet radio reception.

AM

FM/DAB

Online radio

Next to the name of the station, monitor- ing of active traffic information stations (TP).

Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band To display the frequency band for man- ual selection of the FM frequency. Only possible when the summary station list is disconnected. DAB not available. DAB stations support presentations (sli- deshow).

Symbols on the AM frequency band Manually updating the station list. To display the frequency band for man- ual selection of the AM frequency.

Menus in Internet radio mode Show station selection. Open text search. Show the last online radio stations heard. Show the 100 most played radio stations and podcasts. Show available online radio podcasts.

Show online radio stations, grouped by country. Show online radio stations by the de- sired language.

TP

Show online radio stations whose pro- gramme belongs to the desired musical genre.

Selecting, tuning and saving a sta- tion

Select the frequency band Before selecting a station you have to select a frequency band or a type of reception. Dif- ferent stations are available depending on the frequency band selected or the type of reception.

The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country.

Select the frequency band or type of re- ception: AM, FM/DAB, FM (for devices that do not have DAB), Internet radio.

Search and select a station You can select radio stations in different ways. The options vary depending on the fre- quency band and the type of reception.

Select via the frequency band (AM and FM) Activate the frequency band.

170

Infotainment operation

Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre- quency band and release it when you reach the frequency band you want. OR: press on a point on the frequency band. The cursor will automatically jump to the corresponding frequency.

The station of the set frequency is tuned.

Select from the station list (AM and FM/DAB) The station list shows the stations that are currently tunable. In the AM frequency band, you may have to update the station list if you are no longer in the area where you last ac- cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre- quency band, the station list is automatically updated.

Open the station list Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned. In the case of FM/DAB and if the station is available, the best quality reception is automatically selec- ted.

Search and filter stations (Internet radio) In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered by categories and can be searched by text.

Open the station list.

Select the category by which the stations are to be filtered. OR: press to start the text search. The in- put field is displayed. Enter the name of the station you want. The list of the stations found is updated while en- tering the text. Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned.

Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB) In SCAN mode the stations are automatically tuned in a sequential manner and each of them is played for approx. 5 seconds.

To start the SCAN mode, under Settings press SCAN.

SCAN mode starts and the station currently tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is a SCAN function button.

To select a station press SCAN.

SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned. The SCAN function button is hidden.

Storing the station on the preset buttons You can store up to 36 stations of different frequency bands and reception types as fa- vourites using the preset buttons.

Tune the station you want.

Access the preset buttons. Press the preset button and keep it pressed until the station is stored. OR: press the station on the station list and keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis- played. Press the preset button.

The station is stored in the selected preset button.

If a station was already stored in the preset button, it is overwritten with the new station.

Special functions in Radio mode

Traffic information (TP) The TP function monitors the announcements of a station with traffic information and auto- matically reproduces them in the Radio mode or in the multimedia playback that is active. To do this, you have to be able to tune into a station with traffic information.

Some stations without their own traffic infor- mation support the TP function by broad- casting traffic information from other stations (EON).

In the AM frequency band or in the Multime- dia mode, a station with traffic information in the background is automatically tuned while

171

Infotainment system

it is possible to tune into a station with traffic information.

If no station with traffic information can be tuned in, the device automatically searches for stations with tunable traffic information.

Stations with traffic information are not avail- able in all countries.

Activating and deactivating the TP func- tion In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press Settings > Traffic station (TP).

Online radio Online radio is a type of reception for Internet radio stations and podcasts that are inde- pendent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Inter-

net transmission, reception is not limited to the region.

Online radio is only available through the In- ternet connection of the active infotainment system. The use of online radio can generate expenses due to the transmission of data from the Internet.

In Online radio mode, press and set the au- dio quality to high or low to tune the online ra- dio.

Station logos In the case of some frequency bands, station logos may already be pre-installed in the in- fotainment system.

If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings the automatic selection of station logos is ac- tivated, station logos are automatically as- signed to the stations.

In the Online radio mode, the infotainment system accesses the station logos of the on- line database and automatically assigns them to the stations

Assign station logos manually In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos. Press on the icon and then select the station to which a station logo is to be as- signed. Select the station logo. If desired, repeat the same process with other stations. OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos.

172

Infotainment operation

Media Mode

Introduction

Fig. 124 Schematic representation: Multimedia view

In Media mode you can play multimedia files from data media and streaming services through the infotainment system.

Depending on the equipment, the following data media can be used:

USB storage support (for example, a USB stick, a mobile phone connected via USB). Bluetooth device (for example, a mobile phone or a tablet).

Depending on the equipment, the following types of multimedia files can be played:

Audio files.

Video files (depends on the system).

You can also use streaming services. The availability of streaming services depends on the equipment and the country.

To use streaming services you need to have your own user account in the streaming serv- ice in question.

Access the MEDIA menu Press HOME > Fig. 124.

Access the settings Press HOME > > .

Limitations and indications of data media Data media may not work if they have been exposed to high temperatures or have been damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac- turers indications.

Quality differences between data media pro- duced by different manufacturers can cause multimedia playback malfunctions.

Incorrect configuration on a data media may cause the data media to be unreadable.

Playlists only specify a playback order and refer to the storage location of the multime- dia files within the folder structure. In a

173

Infotainment system

playlist there are no multimedia files saved. To play a playlist, multimedia files have to be found in the storage places of the data media to which the playlist refers.

Note SEAT assumes no liability for any deteriora- tion or loss of files on data storage devices.

Features of the multimedia equip- ment and symbols

Audio, multimedia and connectivity: Multimedia playback and control via Blue- tooth. Audio playback in these formats: AAC, ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA. Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, DivX 3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264 (.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 10 (.wmv, .asf). Playlists on any type of device. Multimedia streaming (online). Multimedia search.

Universal symbols in Media mode To start playback. To pause playback.

To change to the previous title. To change to the next title. Repeat the current track. Repeat all titles. To activate the shuffle playback order. To display the favourites list. Add multimedia file as favourite. Top right: Select multimedia source. Access the settings. Open the search. To return to the top folder of the multi- media source.

Select and play a multimedia source

Select multimedia source Before playing multimedia files you must first connect a multimedia source.

To use streaming services you must be con- nected to the Internet.

Connect an external multimedia source. Select the connected media source to be used for playback.

Playing audio and video files You can search and play multimedia files from an available multimedia source in differ- ent ways.

Search in the folder structure Multimedia files can be catalogued by cate- gories (for example, album, artist, title). In My media this category view is always dis- played. The classic folder structure of individ- ual USB data media is also found in My me- dia.

Activate the folder structure. The folder structure of the selected mul- timedia source is displayed. When My media is selected, the categories (mu- sic, videos, playlists) and connected multimedia sources are displayed first. Search for the title you want in the folder structure. OR: press to start the text search. The input field is displayed. Enter the name of the desired title. The list of the titles found is updated while entering the text. Press the desired title. If at the beginning of the playback your selection is in a folder of a multimedia source, the multimedia files that are in it are also added to the playback.

1.

2.

3.

4.

174

Infotainment operation

If a playlist is played, all available titles in the playlist are added to the play- back. Close your selection with .

Select favourites In favourites you can save titles, music gen- res, artists and albums individually for play- back.

Access favourites . Press the favourite you want.

Depending on your selection, all the titles be- longing to the favourite are added to the playback.

Configure streaming services Depending on the equipment you can use streaming services directly through the info- tainment system. For this you need to have a premium user account of the streaming serv- ice in question and you have to log in with it in the infotainment system. You also need to be connected to the Internet.

Select Streaming as the multimedia source. A list of available streaming services is displayed.

5.

1.

Select the streaming service you want. Follow the steps indicated by the info- tainment system. The streaming service is added to the list of multimedia sources as a new function button.

Save favourites Only multimedia files in My media of the info- tainment system can be saved as favourites. You can save up to a maximum of 30 titles, al- bums, artists and music genres individually as favourites.

Start playback. Access favourites. Tap a favourite that is not assigned. OR: press on an existing favourite and old for approx. 3 seconds. Select from the selection list: Title, Al- bum, Artist, Music genres, Playlist.

The selection is saved instead of the previ- ously selected favourite. If the favourite was already assigned, the previously saved fa- vourite is overwritten.

The selectable options in the selection list depend on the data attached to the multime-

2. 3.

1. 2. 3.

4.

dia file. If the music genre is not indicated in the music files, for example, you cannot save the music genre as favourite.

If a video file is playing, only that video can be saved as favourite.

Playing entertainment content in the infotainment system

Depending on the infotainment system, vid- eos can be played.

Video mode When in video mode, a video can be played on the infotainment screen if this is stored on a data media, in My media or is sourced from a streaming service. In this case, the video sound is played through the vehicle's speak- ers.

The image is only displayed if the vehicle is stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the in- fotainment screen turns off. The sound of the video can still be heard.

A stable Internet connection is required for playback from a streaming service. In this case, telephony costs may be generated.

175

Infotainment system

Navigation

Introduction

Fig. 125 Schematic representation: Navigation view

A global satellite system determines the cur- rent position of the vehicle and the sensors mounted on the vehicle analyse the routes taken. All measured values and possible traf- fic events are compared with the available maps to allow optimal navigation to the des- tination.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep- resentations will guide you to your destina- tion.

Navigation management is carried out on the screen.

Depending on the country, some functions of the infotainment system will not be available

on the screen when travelling above a certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance with legislation.

Navigation announcements Navigation announcements are acoustic indi- cations for driving referred to the current route.

The type and frequency of navigation an- nouncements depend on the driving situation, for example, starting the guide to the destina- tion, driving on the motorway or on a round- about and the settings.

If the exact destination cannot be reached because, for example, it is in a non-digitised area, indications relating to the address and the distance to the destination are displayed on the screen.

During dynamic route guidance, you will re- ceive information about reported traffic con- gestion on the route. An additional navigation announcement is provided if the route is re- calculated due to traffic congestion.

While a navigation announcement is playing, its volume can be adjusted. The following navigation announcements provided will be played with the newly adjusted volume.

176

Infotainment operation

Limitations during navigation If the infotainment system cannot receive da- ta from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnel or in an underground garage, navigation con- tinues using the vehicle's sensors.

In areas that are not digitised or are only par- tially digitised on the infotainment memory, the infotainment system will still attempt to provide route guidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga- tion data, it may not be possible to determine the exact position of the vehicle. This may mean that navigation is not as precise as usu- al.

Roads and streets are subject to constant change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads closed to traffic, changes to street names and building numbers). If the navigation data is obsolete, this may lead to errors or inaccur- acies during the route guidance.

Managing the navigation map To allow an optimal view, you can also man- age the navigation map with additional finger movements.

Move the map (tip: use your index finger). Move the map with your finger.

Zoom in the view (tip: use your index finger). To increase the view in a certain position, double-click on the map.

Zoom out the view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). Press on the map with both fingers at the same time.

Change view (tip: use your index finger). Press twice on the map and keep your fin- ger pressed on the screen. To zoom out the view of the map, move your finger upwards. To zoom in the view of the map, move your finger downwards.

Change view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and keep them pressed. To zoom out the view of the map, move one finger towards the other. To zoom in the view of the map, move one finger away from the other.

Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and horizontal to each other, keep them pressed. To tilt the view of the map forward, move your fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the map backward, move your fingers down- wards.

Rotate view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and keep them pressed. To rotate the map view, turn your fingers clockwise anticlockwise.

Saved data The infotainment system saves certain data, for example, frequent routes and position da- ta, to make the entry of the destination more agile and optimise the route guidance.

Delete saved data Press Settings > Basic function settings > Delete and then OK

WARNING Select the settings, enter the destination and the modifications for navigation only with the vehicle at a standstill.

Note If a detour is passed during route guid- ance, navigation may recalculate the route. The quality of the navigation recommen- dations given by the Infotainment system depends on the navigation data available and any reported traffic congestions.

177

Infotainment system

Navigation announcements are not emit- ted if the sound is muted in the infotainment system.

Navigation functions and symbols

Navigation Navigation functions depend on the equip- ment and country.

Functions Entering destination and route calculation (offline and online). Displaying two navigation maps at the same time (display and instrument cluster). Update of online maps. Predictive navigation. 3D urban maps. Online traffic information Dynamic POIs (points of interest)

Symbols on the map The buttons and indications depend on the settings and the current driving situation.

Symbols for traffic events and points of inter- est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex- ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter- esting stopovers, provided navigation has such data page 181.

Current position Search for destinations. Destinations along the route. Final destination Home address Work address Favourite destinations Additional window with more options. Additional window with route options. Centre the map on the current position. Change view: 2D oriented to the north, or 2D oriented to the direction of travel, or 3D to the direction of travel. Information about the current route guidance. Map scale.

Symbols in the additional window To open the additional window, press .

Repeat the last navigation announce- ment. Volume of navigation announcements. Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Night mode. Offer new guidance routes.

Other symbols Entering the detailed destination for an address. Search for destinations. Frequent destinations. Last destinations. Favourite destinations Back

Symbols in the route details Current position. Destination of the current guidance.

POI symbols (points of interest) POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map, provided the navigation has said data.

Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to start a route guidance page 179.

Petrol station. Parking lot. Tourist information offices. Train station. Restaurant.

Traffic information. POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map, provided the navigation has said data page 181.

178

Infotainment operation

Click on a traffic event to open an additional window with further details page 181.

Slow traffic.

Traffic jam.

Accident.

Broken down vehicle.

Slippery surface (ice or snow).

Road closed to traffic.

Slippery road hazard.

Danger.

Road works.

Strong wind.

Reduced visibility.

Navigation data

The Infotainment system is equipped with a built-in navigation data memory. Depending on the country, the necessary navigation da- ta may already be pre-installed.

To provide correct route guidance and make the most of the functions offered, the infotain- ment system should be updated on a regular basis.

Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur- ing navigation. Current routes cannot be traced or the route guidances will lead to mistaken destinations.

Ensure navigation data is updated at all times.

Online updating of navigation data The navigation data of the regions through which you travel frequently is automatically updated in the background if the Internet connection is established and the privacy settings are valid.

With the ignition switched on, the naviga- tion data is updated automatically.

Manual update of navigation data Current navigation data for large regions, for example Western Europe, can be downloa- ded from www.seat.com and stored on USB data devices. Navigation through USB data devices is not possible.

Download the navigation data to a USB da- ta device. Turn on the ignition of the vehicle. Connect the USB data device to the info- tainment system. Navigation data is automat- ically updated in the background.

The map version is displayed in HOME > > System information.

WARNING If you update the navigation data manually while driving, it may cause accidents with serious injuries. Update the navigation data only with the vehicle at a standstill.

Note Automatic update of the navigation data is subject to the privacy settings. In Incogni- to mode, no update is carried out.

Start route guidance

Depending on the country and equipment, different functions are available to enter des- tinations.

The different functions for entering destina- tions are found in the navigation main menu.

Opening the Navigation main menu Press HOME > .

Select the destination and start naviga- tion

Press . Select the desired destination. You can chose from Frequent destinations, Last destinations and Favourite destinations.

1. 2.

179

Infotainment system

OR: press and enter the address in the input screen. OR: detailed address. Press Start.

Frequent destinations The destination synopsis uses recorded data to propose possible destinations.

Select the destination and start naviga- tion

Press and then . Select the desired destination. The route guidance starts automatically.

Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold the desired destination for a few seconds.

Last destinations Navigation saves the last destinations to make them available for a route guidance.

Select the destination and start naviga- tion

Press and then . Press the desired destination. Press Start.

Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold the desired destination for a few seconds.

3.

1. 2.

1. 2. 3.

Favourite destinations Save up to 20 destinations as favourites.

To save a destination as a favourite press in the split screen when entering the destina- tion.

Select the destination and start naviga- tion

Press and then . Press the desired destination. Press Start.

Note Enter the destination as accurately as pos- sible. If you enter a destination incorrectly, the route guidance will not be able to start or it will guide you to an incorrect destina- tion.

Start route guidance by selecting from the map

The navigation map includes active areas at many points that are suitable for entering the destination. To do this, press the desired posi- tion or place on the map. If there is map data at this point, you can start a route guidance.

Whether it is possible to enter the destination through the navigation map depends on the

1. 2. 3.

state of the data and it is not possible for all positions.

To start offroad navigation, press an empty area without position data.

Start navigation Press . Move the view on the map until the desired position can be selected. The navigation map can be used by means of additional finger movements page 177. Press the desired destination on the map. Press Route.

Offroad navigation Offroad navigation calculates routes to se- lected destination points using unknown da- ta. When a destination point is outside the known roads or position data, navigation finds the route to the next point of the known road and completes the path to the next des- tination point with a direct connection.

Start navigation Move the view on the map until the desired position can be selected. The navigation map can be used by means of additional finger movements page 177. Press on any point on the map without posi- tion data. Press Route.

180

Infotainment operation

Start route guidance using contact details

Start route guidance with the saved address data of a contact. Contacts saved without address data cannot be used for route guid- ance.

Start navigation Press . Press on the contact you want. Press Route.

Note If the address details of a contact are ob- solete, the route guidance will nevertheless take you to the registered address. Check that the contact address is updated.

Traffic information

The infotainment system receives detailed traffic information automatically if the Inter- net connection is established. This informa- tion is shown with symbols and highlighting the road network in colour on the map.

Traffic incidents Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or congested traffic, are shown on the naviga- tion map using symbols.

With an active route guidance, traffic inci- dents that are on the current route are shown in the route details. Such traffic incidents can be avoided page 181.

Hazard information Hazard information is shown on the naviga- tion map with symbols in the same way as traffic incidents. In this case, the source of this information is another vehicle that has detec- ted the hazard and has uploaded the infor- mation to the service provider.

The hazards shown are: accident, broken down vehicle and slippery road surface.

Traffic flow indication The navigation map shows traffic flow ac- cording to current traffic events, highlighting the road network in colour.

Orange: Slow traffic. Red: Traffic jam.

Note Traffic information receipt is subject to the privacy settings. In maximum Privacy mode, no traffic information is received. Tracking or Location level setting is neces- sary.

Function descriptions

Route details The route details contain information on all incidents, for example, the starting point, stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina- tion, provided the navigation has such data.

If you press on an incident, an additional win- dow opens providing more options. The avail- able options depend on the incident and the current settings.

Open and close the route details To open, press | or swipe it.

To close, press | or swipe it.

Edit route guidance To edit route guidance, move the stopovers to the destination in the TripView view.

Hold the desired destination pressed until it is visibly highlighted. Move the destination to the desired posi- tion. Remove your finger from the screen. The route will recalculate.

Avoid traffic incidents The details of the route show the current traf- fic incidents if the navigation has such data.

181

Infotainment system

Avoid traffic incidents by editing route details page 181.

Press on a traffic event. Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.

Split screen When handling navigation functions, an addi- tional window with other options may open. Possible options depend on the function be- ing used.

Close the additional screen Press on an empty area outside the addi- tional window. OR: press . OR: press Accept.

Functions in the additional window:

Show on map Show what is selected on the map.

Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid- ance.

Direct route Starts direct route guidance.

Functions in the additional window:

Delete Delete a stopover from the route guidance.

Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re- calculate.

Stopping route guidance

Ends the current route guidance.

Close the additional window.

Add a destination to favourites.

Learn usage pattern When the vehicle is in motion, navigation saves routes and destinations used to auto- matically generate destination proposals. Destinations are learned based on the time of day and the day of the week.

Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the same time. The proposed routes may be dif- ferent from the routes of the normal route guidance.

If one of the proposed destinations is selec- ted, the guide to that destination is started.

The route guidance follows the selected route until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case, the route is recalculated and takes you back along the most direct path to the initially se- lected destination.

Important traffic jams are taken into account in the route guidance, and are avoided if al- ternative routes are available, provided navi- gation has such data.

You can activate and deactivate the function whenever you want.

Enable and disable learning usage pattern The setting is in the corresponding navigation menu > Basic function settings.

To activate the function, activate Learn us- age pattern. To disable the function, disable Learn us- age pattern. To delete saved data, press Delete usage pattern.

182

Infotainment operation

Telephone interface

Introduction

Fig. 126 Schematic representation: Phone view

You can use the telephone interface to con- nect your mobile to the infotainment system and operate phone functions through it. The sound is played through the vehicle's speak- ers.

You can connect up to two mobile phone de- vices simultaneously to the infotainment sys- tem.

High speeds, poor weather or road conditions and a noisy ambience (even outside of the vehicle), as well as the quality of reception can all affect the quality of a telephone con- versation in the vehicle.

Note As a general rule, pairing a device (for ex- ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec- essary once. You can restore the device connection via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi with the infotainment system whenever you want without having to pair the device again. The availability of some telephone func- tions will depend on the mobile phone con- nected to the infotainment system.

Telephone interface equipment and symbols

Equipment features Hands-free function. Use up to two phones at the same time. Phone book with up to 5,000 contacts, de- pending on the infotainment system. SMS functions via Bluetooth: SMS reading, SMS writing (templates included), SMS play- back, message history. Email functions via Bluetooth: reading email, writing email.

183

Infotainment system

Connection to wireless charging option. Connection to the microphone mounted on the vehicle.

Symbols in the main menu Contacts. List of incoming and outgoing calls. Enter telephone number. Text messages (SMS and emails). Telephone interface settings.

Symbols for calls The symbols may be different depending on the infotainment system.

Start a call or bringing it to the fore- ground. End or reject a call. Open contact list. Enter telephone number. Mute the sound of the hands-free Hold call. Continue call. Start conference call. Pass call to private mode Make an emergency call. Get help in case of breakdown.

Obtain information on the SEAT brand and selected additional services related to traffic and your travel. Voice mail.

Call list symbols To open the call lists, press .

Incoming call. Outgoing call. Missed call. Telephone number (company). Telephone number (private). Mobile telephone number (company).

Mobile telephone number (private). Fax (private). Fax.

Symbols for text messages The symbols may be different depending on the infotainment system.

To open the text messages, press .

Activate voice control input page 167. Templates for text messages.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the tele- phone interface in places with a risk of explo- sion. These places are not always clearly marked. They include, for example:

The vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks. The lower decks of boats and ferries. In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq- uefied gas (such as propane or butane). Places where the air is laden with chemi- cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal powder. All other places where the vehicle engine or telephone must be switched off.

WARNING Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a risk of explosion!

Note In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile phones is forbidden, it must be switched off at all times. The radi- ation produced by the mobile phone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.

184

Infotainment operation

Pair, connect and manage

Requirement for pairing:

Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone device. Bluetooth is activated on the infotainment system. Depending on the mobile device, it will be necessary to have the Bluetooth menu open or activate the Visibility option so that the device is visible from the infotainment system.

Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel- ephony with the infotainment system to use the telephone interface functions. On the first connection, the mobile phone device is paired with the infotainment system. Doing so saves a user profile page 185.

The pairing can take a few minutes. The func- tions available depend on the mobile phone device used and its operating system.

Pair a mobile phone device Open the list of available Bluetooth devi- ces on the mobile phone device and select the name of the infotainment system. Please note and, if necessary, confirm the messages that appear on the mobile phone device and on the infotainment system. If the pairing was successful, the phone data is saved in the user profile.

Optional: confirm the data transfer mes- sage on the mobile phone device.

Active and passive connection To use the functions of the telephone inter- face, there must be at least one mobile phone device connected to the infotainment system. If there are several mobile phone de- vices connected to the infotainment system, you can switch between active and passive connections. To use the telephone interface with the desired mobile phone device, estab- lish the active connection with the infotain- ment system.

Difference between connection types

Primary The mobile phone device is paired and connected. The functions of the tele- phone interface are performed with the data of said mobile phone device.

Secon- dary

The mobile phone device is paired and connected. Calls can be managed but the phone book, messages or other functions will not be active.

Paired mobile phone devices are stored in the infotainment system, even if they are not cur- rently connected.

Connect a mobile phone device Requirement: the mobile phone device is paired with the infotainment system. Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone device.

Establish an active connection Requirement: several mobile phone devices are connected to the infotainment system at the same time. Select the desired mobile phone device from the drop-down menu. All other mobile phone devices are automatically in the pas- sive connection.

User profiles For each of the paired mobile phone devices an individual user profile is automatically cre- ated. In the user profile, data from the mobile phone device is stored, for example, contact details or settings. A maximum of four user profiles can be saved in the infotainment sys- tem at the same time.

WARNING If you perform the pairing while driving, it could cause an accident or injury. Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a standstill.

185

Infotainment system

Note In the pairing of some mobile phone devi- ces, a PIN number is shown on the screen of the mobile phone device. Enter that number in the infotainment system to complete the pairing. While the infotainment system is in the Known mobile phones menu, the wireless charging function is disabled. When you exit this menu, the wireless charging func- tion is activated again.

Basic and Comfort Telephony

Depending on the equipment, two types of telephone interface can be used:

Basic telephone interface. Comfort telephone interface.

Basic telephone interface The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue- tooth HFP profile for transmission. This inter- face allows the use of telephone functions through the infotainment system and play- back through the vehicle's speakers.

Comfort telephone interface Like the Basic telephone interface, the Com- fort telephone interface also uses the Blue- tooth HFP profile.

The Comfort phone interface can be equip- ped with the wireless charging function page 187.

In order to use the functions of the wireless charging function, you have to place a suita- ble mobile phone device correctly in the stor- age compartment. The mobile phone device will then connect to the vehicle antenna. This improves the reception and sound quality of calls.

To call

Open the telephone interface Press HOME > .

Make a call Select a phone number to start a call. Differ- ent functions are available for selecting a phone number:

Contacts If a contact has several registered phone numbers you have to select one.

Press and press a number on the list to start the call. OR: press and enter the contact name in the input field to search for it. Press on the contact to start the call.

OR: press a favourite in the telephone inter- face main menu to start the call.

Calls The telephone interface shows the call list of the mobile telephone device. Start a call from the call list.

Press > All and press a number on the list to start the call. OR: press and filter the call list entries (for example, missed calls or dialled num- bers). In filtered list, press a number to start the call.

Dial Manually enter a phone number to start a call. While entering the phone number, con- tacts that match that number are shown on the infotainment screen.

Press and enter telephone number. Press to start the call

The last call is dialled by pressing and hold- ing the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Send messages

Depending on the mobile phone device and the infotainment system used, you can send

186

Infotainment operation

and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel- ephone interface.

Send an SMS Press > Text message > Enter new message and enter the message on the screen. Enter the contact you want in the search bar. To send the message press OK.

Send an e-mail Press > E-mail > Enter new message and enter the message on the screen. Enter the contact you want in the search bar. To send the message press OK.

Phone book, favourites and speed dial buttons

In the first connection of a telephone with the infotainment system, the phone book is saved in the infotainment system. It may be neces- sary to confirm the data transmission on the mobile phone.

Each time the phone is reconnected, the phone book is updated.

If conference calls are supported, the phone book can be accessed during a call. If there is a saved image for a contact, it can be dis- played in the list next to the entry.

Favourites A speed dial button can be assigned to a maximum of 5 or 6 favourites from the phone book (depending on the equipment). If there is a registered photo saved to the contact, it is shown on the speed dial button.

All speed dial buttons have to be manually edited and will be assigned to a user profile.

Assign the speed dial button In the Favourites menu, press the button, then open the phone book to select a con- tact as a favourite. If the contact has several phone numbers, press on the number in the list.

Edit the speed dial button To edit or delete a favourite contact press on the icon in the Favourites menu screen. You can delete one or more favourites.

Call a favourite Press the assigned speed dial button.

Note Favourites are not updated automatically. If you change a contact's phone number, you have to reassign the speed dial button.

Connectivity Box

Fig. 127 In the centre console: pad for the mo- bile phone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes the Wireless Charger functionality.

187

Infotainment system

Wireless Charger The Wireless Charger allows mobile devices with Qi1) technology to be charged without a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up Fig. 127 .

Make sure there are no objects between the pad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto- matically. For further information about whether your mobile device uses Qi technol- ogy, check your phone's user manual or visit the SEAT website.

WARNING The mobile phone may heat up due to the wireless charging. Think about this before you pick it up, and take care when removing it. There must be no metallic or other ob- jects between the mobile phone and the housing, to prevent the functionality of the Connectivity Box from being affected.

Note Your mobile device must support the Qi inductive charging interface standard for proper operation. The charging time and the temperature vary in accordance with the device used. The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. Qi technology does not allow you to charge more than one mobile device simul- taneously. You are advised to keep the engine run- ning to guarantee proper wireless charg- ing. When a telephone with Qi technology is connected by USB, it will be charged by the means specified by the manufacturer.

Multimedia

USB port

Fig. 128 Centre console: USB port.

Depending on the equipment and the coun- try, the vehicle may have different types of USB connections.

The USB port can be found in the storage compartment area of the front centre con- sole Fig. 128.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo- bile phone wirelessly.

188

Start and driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition lock

Fig. 129 Ignition key positions.

Key positions Fig. 129 Ignition off. Key can be removed from the vehicle. Ignition is switched on. Starting the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel Lock the steering wheel: remove the key from the ignition and turn the wheel until it

1

2

3

locks. Depending on the country, in vehicles with automatic transmission, in order to re- move the key, move the gear shift to the P po- sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block- ing key and release it. Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into the ignition and turn it at the same time as the steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer- ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Start-Stop system If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on.

Automatic transmission: before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch- ed off and the selector lever is in position P.

WARNING Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or operate electrical equipment, resulting in an accident. The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Note If it is difficult to turn the ignition key to the position 2 , move the steering wheel to both sides to release the steering lock. If the vehicle battery is disconnected and reconnected, the key must remain in the position 2 for around 5 seconds before starting up. Vehicles with automatic transmission,de- pending on the country, after switching off the ignition, you can only remove the igni- tion key if the selector lever is in position P (parking lock). Next, the selector lever is locked.

Ignition and start button

Fig. 130 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: start button.

The engine can be started with a start button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid

189

Driving

key inside the vehicle in the area of the front or rear seats, or on the centre console.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access page 96system, the engine can also be started with the key in the luggage compart- ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting the vehicle activates the electronic lock on the steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually If you only want to switch on the ignition (without starting the engine), briefly press the start button once without pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal .

The push-button text flashes like a heartbeat when the system is ready for the ignition to be turned on or off.

Automatic ignition disconnection If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni- tion does not switch off automatically. The ig- nition is switched off by pressing the lock but- ton on the remote control or by pressing the sensor surface on the door lever Fig. 84.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on vehicles with the Start-Stop system The ignition is switched off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- matic engine shutdown is active, if:

The driver's seat belt is not fastened, the driver does not step on any pedal, the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if the dipped beam is on, the side light re- mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is enough charge in the battery). If the driver locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out.

Engine restart feature If no key is detected inside the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec- onds to restart it. A warning will display on the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.

My Beat function For vehicles with a convenience key there is the My Beat function. This feature provides an additional indication of the vehicle ignition system.

When entering the vehicle, the start button Fig. 130 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine start button flashes. With the ignition is switched off, the start button goes off after a few sec- onds.

With the engine running, the start button light stays on, indicating that the engine is running. The time elapsed between the moment the user starts the engine with the start button and the lighting changes from flashing to fixed will depend on specific engine size characteristics. When the start button is used to stop the engine, the button starts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the My Beat function also offers additional in- formation:

When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the start button stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains active even though the engine is off. When the engine cannot be started again with the Start-Stop system, page 194, and needs to be started manually, the start button flashes to indicate this situation.

WARNING When switching on the ignition, do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine could start immediately.

190

Start and driving

WARNING If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- out due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury. Never leave any key inside the vehicle when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un- authorised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition and operate any of the electrical equipment.

Note Before leaving the vehicle, always dis- connect the ignition and, if appropriate, take into account the instructions on the screen of the dash panel. If the vehicle is stationary for a long time with the engine off and the ignition on, the vehicle battery might be discharged and it might not be possible to start the engine. If during the STOP phase you press the button, the ignition is switch-

ed off and the button flashes. If the indication is displayed on the in- strument panel display Start-Stop system deactivated: Start the engine manually; the button will flash.

Starting the engine

Before starting the engine Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal and keep it in this position until the engine starts. Vehicles with automatic transmission: put the lever in position P or N.

Vehicles with ignition locks Turn the key to position Fig. 129 2 . Keep turning the key to position Fig. 129 3 without stepping on the accel- erator. Once the engine starts, release the key. When it is released, the key returns to position

2 . If the engine does not start, stop and wait for around 1 minute to try again.

Vehicles with start buttons Press and hold the brake pedal until the en- gine starts. Press the starter button Fig. 130; do not press the accelerator. There needs to be a valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to start. After starting the engine, the lighting of the START ENGINE STOP button changes to steady lighting, indicating that the engine has started.

Once the engine starts, release the start-up button. If the engine does not start, stop and wait for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, perform an emergency start page 193.

WARNING Do not keep the engine running in confined spaces, as there is a danger of poisoning. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon- oxide, an odourless and colourless poison- ous gas that can cause loss of conscious- ness and death.

WARNING Do not get out of the vehicle with the en- gine running, especially if a gear is engag- ed. The vehicle could then suddenly move or something strange could happen that would cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING Never use cold start sprays, they could ex- plode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Doing this risks injury.

CAUTION The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to start the engine while driving or if you restart it immediately after switching it off.

191

Driving

When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Note Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts. When starting with a cold engine, noise levels may briefly increase. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. In vehicles with a natural gas engine (CNG), by default, the engine starts with gas, with the exception of the following ca- ses: Coolant temperature below -15C. After refuelling CNG.

Turning off the engine

Bring the vehicle to a full stop .

With manual transmission, press the clutch all the way down. If the vehicle is automatic, set the selector lever to the P position. Apply the handbrake. Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key to position Fig. 129 1 . Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly press the start-up button Fig. 130.

Emergency disconnection If the engine does not switch off after briefly pressing the starter button, an emergency disconnect will be required:

Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- ond in Ignition and start button on page 190.

WARNING Never switch off the engine while the vehi- cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- jury. The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off. The brake servo does not work with the engine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. You need more

strength to steer when the engine is switch- ed off. If the ignition is switched off, the steering column could be locked, making it impossi- ble to control the vehicle. Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly lock, making it im- possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci- dent!

WARNING Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor- tant if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries.

CAUTION If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- Stop system switches off the engine, the ig- nition remains switched on. Make sure that the ignition is switched off before leaving the vehicle, otherwise the battery could discharge. If the engine has been driven at high speed for a prolonged period of time, it may overheat when turned off. To avoid en- gine damage, allow the engine to run for approximately two minutes in neutral be- fore switching it off.

192

Start and driving

Note After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It is also possi- ble that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine com- partment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser automatically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the key has to be outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in- strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle cannot be started.

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Note A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 131 On the right of the steering column: emergency start.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, an emergency start-up will be required. The relevant message will appear in the dash panel display. This may happen when, for ex- ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

Immediately after pushing the starter but- ton, keep the key next to the right trim of the steering column Fig. 131, as close as possi- ble to the Kessy logo. The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically.

Start-Stop system

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has been disconnected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru- ment panel display Start-Stop system deactivated. Start the engine manually This indication shows that the Start-Stop system cannot restart the engine.

This happens for 2 reasons: if the driver's door has been opened or if the driver has unbuck- led the seat belt.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Function not available There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault repaired.

193

Driving

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel and reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is stopping. The ignition remains switched on. The engine automatically switches back on when required.

In this scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

When the ignition is switched on, the Start- Stop function is automatically activated.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will light up. The engine can be stopped before stopping completely (approximately 7 km/h). When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- gine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox Brake until the vehicle stops and keep your foot on the brake pedal. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear in

the display. The engine can be stopped be- fore stopping completely (approximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the vehicle's gearbox). When you take your foot off the brake ped- al the engine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode The driver door must be closed. The driver's seat belt must be fastened. The bonnet must be closed. The engine has reached operating temper- ature. The reverse gear must not be engaged. The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.

The engine does not turn off for various reasons Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri- fies whether certain conditions are met. The engine does not switch off, in the following situations for example:

The engine has not yet reached the re- quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode. The temperature selected on the climate control has not been reached.

The interior temperature is very high/low. Defrost function button activated page 137. Park assist is switched on. The battery is very low. The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- ing turned. If there is a danger of misting. After engaging reverse gear. In case of a very steep gradient.

is displayed on the instrument cluster screen; it is also displayed in the driver infor- mation system, .

The engine starts by itself When stopped, the normal system mode may be interrupted in the following situations. The engine restarts by itself without involvement from the driver.

The interior temperature differs from the temperature selected on the climate control. Defrost function button activated page 137. The brake has been pressed several times consecutively. The battery is too low.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access. 194

Start and driving

High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto- matic gearbox The engine stops when the selector lever is in the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P, the engine will also remain switched off when you take your foot off the brake pedal. In or- der to start the engine up again the accelera- tor must be pressed, or another gear engag- ed or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop- ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the engine from accidentally starting when passing through R.

Additional information about vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will start up again in certain operating conditions if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle ahead drives off again.

WARNING Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is stationary. The operation of the brake and steering will not be fully guaranteed. More force will be needed to turn the steer- ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an accident and even serious injuries.

To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment page 195.

CAUTION The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded areas page 208.

Note In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or increasing the brake force applied. While the vehicle remains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for example. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop. When stopped, the brake pedal must be kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle does not move. If the engine stalls with a manual gear- box, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards direction must be reached for the system to be in a status to stop the engine.

Manually connecting and discon- necting the Start-Stop system

Fig. 132 Centre console: Start-stop system button.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can switch it off manually.

To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop system, press the button Fig. 132.

The button symbol remains lit up yellow when the system is switched off.

Note The system switches on every time the en- gine is turned off voluntarily.

195

Driving

Manual gearbox

Changing gears

Fig. 133 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever Fig. 133.

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. Move the gearbox lever to the required po- sition. Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is stopped.

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down.

With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it downwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse Fig. 133 R . Release the clutch.

Changing down gears While driving, changing down a gear must al- ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di- rectly below and when the engine speed is not too high . Changing down while by- passing one or various gears at high speeds or at high engine speeds can damage the clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch pedal remains depressed .

WARNING When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released. This also happens if the electronic parking brake is switched on. Never engage reverse gear when the ve- hicle is moving.

WARNING If the gear is changed down inappropriate- ly by selecting a gear that is too low, you may lose control of the vehicle, causing an accident and serious injuries.

CAUTION When travelling at high speeds or at high engine speeds, selecting a gear that is too low can cause considerable damage to the clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc- cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held and it does not engage.

CAUTION To prevent damage and avoid premature wear, please observe the following: Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure applied by your hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector forks. Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped- al; although the pressure may seem insig- nificant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do not need to change gear. Always ensure that the vehicle is com- pletely stopped before engaging the re- verse gear. Always press the clutch to the floor when changing gears. Never hold the vehicle on the clutch on hills with the engine on.

196

Start and driving

Automatic gearbox/DSG au- tomatic gearbox

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- mitted via two independent clutches. They replace the torque converter found on con- ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- hicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears manually page 199, Changing gear in Tiptronic mode.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake is not pressed. To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged. The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En- gage the selector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Fig. 134 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever position is shown when the corresponding sign lights up. With the selec- tor lever in the manual gearbox positions M, D and S, the engaged gear is also shown on the display.

Parking lock When the lever is put in this position, the drive wheels are locked. The lever must only be put in P when the vehicle is stationary .

To put the lever in P or take it out of P , the locking button must be pressed and held and the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.

Reverse gear Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling .

To move the lever to position R, the lock but- ton must be pressed and held while pressing the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse lights come on when the lever is in the R posi- tion with the ignition on.

Neutral With the lever in this position, the gear is in neutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) .

Permanent forward drive position The lever in the D/S position enables the gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S, move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever again will select normal mode D. The selec- ted driving mode is shown on the instrument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the best gear ratio. This depends on the engine load, the road speed and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the engine's maximum power output. When accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea- ble.

197

Driving

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun- tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch tiptronic mode page 199, to adapt the gears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lock In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range from being engaged, and prevents the vehi- cle from moving off accidentally.

To release the gear lever lock, press and hold the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the same time, press the lever lock in the direc- tion of the arrow Fig. 134.

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is in positions P or N the following indication will be shown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrake while selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en- gages automatically if the brake pedal is not pressed and the lever is in position N for more than about one second at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph).

Safety interlock for ignition key Once the ignition has been turned off, the key may be removed only if the gear selector is in

position P. While the key is not in the ignition, the selector lever is locked in position P.

WARNING Take care not to press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve- hicle could start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is en- gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident. Never move the lever to R or P when driv- ing. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident or failure. With lever in any position (except P), the foot brake must be pushed down whenever the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed. While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident. As a driver you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is engaged. Apply the parking brake and se- lect the parking lock (P).

Note If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting gear range D or S again. Should the power supply to the lever be interrupted in position P, it will not be possi-

ble to move the lever. If this should happen the manual release can be used page 202.

Note If the lever lock does not engage, there is a fault. The transmission is interrupted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov- ing. Follow the procedure below in order for the lever lock to engage again: With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again. With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the lever to posi- tion P or N and subsequently engage a gear.

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi- cle does not move forwards or back. Pro- ceed to the next mode: When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engag- ed. Press the brake pedal and engage the gear range again.

If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system malfunction. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked.

198

Start and driving

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode

Fig. 135 Lever in the Tiptronic position

Fig. 136 Steering wheel: automatic transmis- sion levers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option to change gears manually.

When you change to the Tiptronic pro- gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently selected gear. This is possible as long as the

system is not changing gear automatically due to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector lever It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode, both when the vehicle is stopped and while driving.

Starting from the D/S position, move the lever to the right. The instrument panel will show whether the lever is in manual or Tip- tronic mode (e.g. M4). Push the lever forwards + or backwards to move up or down a gear Fig. 135. To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the left.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel paddles The gearshift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic) positions.

Press the gearshift paddle + to select a higher gear Fig. 136. Press the gearshift paddle to select a lower gear. To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right- hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap- proximately 1 second or move the lever to the left.

If the paddles are not operated for some time and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection position, it will automatically exit from Tip- tronic mode.

CAUTION When accelerating, if a higher gear is not selected, it will automatically change shortly before reaching the maximum per- mitted RPM. Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys- tem will not change until it detects that the engine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selector lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, below -10 C (+14 F), the engine can only start with the selector lever in position P.

Driving down hills Under certain circumstances it may be ad- vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se- lect the gear manually according to driving conditions .

199

Driving

Stop/Park On level ground, just use the lever to engage position P. On slopes you should first apply the parking brake and then set the lever to P. This makes it easier to remove the lever from position P when starting.

If the driver door is opened and the lever is not in position P, the vehicle could move. The following warning is displayed on the instru- ment panel: Gear change: selector lever in the drive position!. Addi- tionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhill Always press the brake pedal firmly to pre- vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary, apply the handbrake .

Do not accelerate while a range of gears is engaged to prevent the car from rolling downhill .

Hill starts Apply the handbrake. Once you have engaged a gear press the accelerator carefully and disengage the handbrake.

Back-up programme If all the positions of the lever are shown over a light background on the instrument panel display, there is a system fault and the auto-

matic gearbox will operate in with the backup programme. It is still possible to drive the ve- hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se- lected range of gears. Driving in reverse gear may not be possible.

Kick-down The kick-down system provides maximum ac- celeration when the gear selector lever is in the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down, the automatic gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. This takes advantage of the maximum acceleration of the vehicle .

The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Selec- tor lever positions on page 198. Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long periods, as the brakes can overheat. This reduces the braking power, increases the braking distance or even causes a brake system fault. If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi- cles brakes applied with the brake pedal or parking brake.

WARNING Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

CAUTION If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- pressing the accelerator when a gear has been selected. This could cause overheat- ing and damage the automatic gearbox. If you allow the vehicle to roll with the lever in position N and the engine off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged by lack of lubrication. In certain driving situations or traffic con- ditions, the gears could overheat and be damaged! If the warning lamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as you can and wait for the gearbox to cool page 202. If the gearbox operates with the backup programme, take the vehicle to a special- ised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.

downhill assistant

Downhill speed control is activated when the lever is in the D/S position and the brake is applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag- ed.

200

Start and driving

The assistant attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the brake was applied, within logical limits. It may be necessary to correct the speed by press- ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as far as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep slopes you have to switch to tiptronic mode and change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine braking and take the load off the brake system.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with a cruise control system page 212, downhill speed control is acti- vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING The downhill speed control cannot defy the laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be maintained constant in all situations. Al- ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certain distances without using the accelerator, which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in- ertia mode to let the vehicle roll.

Activation of the inertia mode Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130 km / h (12 and 80 mph).

Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru- ment panel , the engaged gear and current consumption will disappear and the word In- ertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage and the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertia mode, simply remove your foot from the ac- celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged section with less energy) and inertia discon- nection (= shorter section without the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and emission balance.

If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile page 204, the inertia mode can be activa- ted in the Normal, Eco and Individual pro- files. In the Eco profile, it is activated whenev- er the operating conditions are met, regard-

less of how smoothly you remove your foot from the accelerator.

WARNING If the inertia mode has been switched on, take into account, when approaching an obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler- ate in the usual manner: risk of accident! When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: risk of accident! If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode.

Note The driver message Inertia is only dis- played with the current consumption. In in- ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis- played (for example D or E will appear instead of D7 or E7). The inertia mode will be automatically disconnected on gradients steeper than 15%. In the case of the 1.6l TDI engine, the iner- tia mode will only work with the Eco driving profile.

201

Driving

Indications on the instrument panel display

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could be damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to cool with the engine at idling speed and the selector lever in position P. When the warning lamp and the driver message switch off, have the fault corrected by a specialised work- shop without delay. If they do not turn off, do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tance.

Faults in the gearbox Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle and place the lever in the posi- tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You may continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving with restric- tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until switching off the engine

Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special- ist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When the warning lamp switches off, you can con- tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en- gage a gear again.

If the warning was caused by the tempera- ture of the gearbox, this driver message will be displayed when the gearbox has cooled again.

Manual release of the selector lev- er

Fig. 137 Gear selector lever: manual release from the parking position.

In the event of a power failure when starting (e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain locked in position P. To move it to position N to move the vehicle, there is an emergency re- lease device under the centre console, on the right side. Releasing the selector lever re- quires a certain degree of practical skill.

Removing the cover from the selector lev- er Apply the handbrake firmly . Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever boot and twist it upwards over the lever handle.

202

Start and driving

Releasing the selector lever Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed down Fig. 137. Press the lock button on the selector lev- er and move it to position N. After completing the emergency release, reattach the selector lever boot to the gear- box console.

WARNING Do not move the lever from position P if the parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you still think the car could move, press the brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could move in an unforeseen way and cause an accident or serious injury.

Gear-change recommenda- tion

Selecting the optimal gear

Depending on the equipment on the instru- ment panel screen, a recommendation is shown with the gear that should be engaged to optimise consumption.

On vehicles with automatic transmission, the lever must be in Tiptronic mode page 199.

No recommendation will appear if the opti- mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be displayed.

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Changing to a higher gear is rec- ommended.

Changing to a lower gear is rec- ommended.

Information regarding the cleanliness of the particulate filter When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, this systems self-cleaning function recommends the optimal gear for that function page 275.

WARNING The gear change recommendation is an auxiliary function and in no case should be a substitute for careful driving. Responsibility for selecting the correct gear, depending on the circumstances, rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environment Selecting the correct gear can help to save fuel.

Note The recommended gear indication turns off when the clutch pedal is pressed or when the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi- tion.

Steering

Information relating to different ve- hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adapts electronically to the speed of the car, torque and steering angle.

Even if the power steering fails or the engine is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate the steering wheel as long as the key remains in the ignition lock, but more force must be applied.

Steering assist This help assists the driver in critical situa- tions. It recommends turning the steering wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid skidding .

203

Driving

WARNING Steering assist helps the driver in critical situations. The driver is the person who has to control the vehicle's steering at all times.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Faulty steering. Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as possible and in a safe manner. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation. Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have the steering checked. If the warning light does not come on again after re- starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is not necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and re- connected. Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed. When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc- tions.

OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock. Remove the key from the ignition switch and recon- nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru- ment panel display. Do not continue driving if the steering column re- mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek specialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.

WARNING Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- es. If the warning lamps and the correspond- ing messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, causing serious damage or accidents and injuries. Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.

SEAT Drive Profiles

Introduction

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to choose between the Eco, Normal, Sport and Individual profiles, which modify the be- haviour of several vehicle functions, providing different driving experiences.

The Individual profile can be configured according to personal preferences. The other profiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the following functions:

Engine Depending on the profile selected, the engine responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac- celerator being pressed. When the Eco profile is selected, the Start-stop function is activa- ted.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the gear change timing is changed to put the changes at higher or lower revolutions. The Eco profile activates the Inertia function, thereby reducing consumption. The rest of the driving profiles will activate the inertia use

204

Start and driving

function when the selector lever is not in the S position, depending on how the accelerator pedal is released page 201. When the ve- hicle is turned on again, the function is activa- ted by default to reduce consumption.

With manual transmission, the Eco profile changes the gear change recommendations to facilitate more efficient driving.

Dual Ride suspension The Dual Ride suspension sets the suspen- sion to comfortable in the Eco and Normal profiles, and to sport in the Sport profile. In the Individual profile the suspension can be switched between Normal or Sport, de- pending on personal preference.

In the event of a fault in the Dual Ride sus- pension, the following message is displayed on the instrument panel screen Fault: shock absorber regulation.

Steering Power steering becomes harder in the Sport profile to enable a sportier driving style.

Air conditioning In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate in the Eco profile, especially restricting fuel consumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The ACCs acceleration and braking mode varies according to the driving profile page 219.

Setting the driving profile

Fig. 138 Next to the gear lever: MODE button.

You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco and Individual.

The desired profile can be selected by suc- cessively pressing the selection button Fig. 138.

An icon on the touch screen provides infor- mation about the active profile.

The illumination of the button lights up when the active profile is anything other than Normal.

Driving pro- file Characteristics

Places the vehicle in a low state of consumption, facilitating a fuel-saving driving style that is respectful to the environment.

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi- ence, suitable for everyday use.

Sport

Provides a complete dynamic performance in the vehicle, ena- bling the user a more sporty driv- ing style.

Individual

It allows you to personalise the configuration. The functions that can be adjusted depend on the equipment fitted in the vehicle.

Kick-down The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- celeration page 200.

If the Eco profile has been selected in the SEAT Drive Profile, and the accelerator is pressed beyond a hard point, the engine power is automatically controlled to give your vehicle maximum acceleration.

WARNING When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at- tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause an accident.

205

Driving

Note Your speed and driving style must always be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf- fic conditions. The Eco profile is not recommended when towing a vehicle.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.

Running-in the engine A new engine must be driven through a run-in period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles). During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bed- ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future engine per- formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate speed (espe- cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce engine wear and increase its useful life. Never drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always engage a lower gear when the engine works

irregularly. For the first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note:

Do not use full throttle. Do not force the engine above two thirds of its maximum speed. Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to 1000 miles), gradually increase power until reaching the maximum speed and high engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres page 289. Information about brakes page 234.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and the engine oil consumption reduced.

Off-roader?

Your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: it does not have enough ground clearance to be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as possible.

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all depend largely on driving style. Consumption can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi- cient driving type. The following section gives you some tips on lessening the impact on the environment and reducing your operating costs at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT) Depending on vehicle equipment, the active cylinder management (ACT) may deacti- vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv- ing situation does not require too much pow- er.

The number of active cylinders can be seen on the instrument panel display. page 69.

Foresight when driving If you think ahead when driving, you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when- ever possible, with a gear engaged. This takes advantage of the engine braking effect, reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis- sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.

206

Start and driving

Changing gear to save energy An effective way of saving is to change in ad- vance to a higher gear.

Manual transmission: shift up from first to second gear as soon as possible. Choosing the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the highest possible gear appropriate for the driving situation (the engine should continue functioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu- ally and without reaching the kick-down position.

Avoid driving at high speed Avoid travelling at your vehicles top speed, whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis- sion of harmful gases and noise pollution multiply as speed is increased. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling time In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is automatically reduced. In vehicles without the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off the engine, for example, at level crossings and at traffic lights that remain red for long periods of time. When an engine has reached operating temperature, and depending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off for a minimum of about 5 seconds already saves more than the amount of fuel necessa- ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- tant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the en- gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenance Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even before the engine is started. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their optimal operating temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionate amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- ing temperature after about four kilometres (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return to a normal level.

Check tyre pressure Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the correct pressures page 291 to save fuel. If the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump- tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater

rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa- ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero- dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re- move it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel.

Save electrical energy The engine drives the alternator, thereby generating electricity. This implies that any increase in power consumption also increa- ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that use a lot of electricity include the blower at a high setting, the rear window heating or the seat heating.

Note If you have the Start-Stop system, it is recommended that it should not be discon- nected.

207

Driving

It is recommended that you close the windows when driving at more than 60 km/h (37 mph). Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the plate slip. This causes wear and can dam- age the clutch plate. Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the brake. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged. Use the engine brake on downhills by changing to the gear that is best suited for the gradient. Fuel consumption will be zero and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on flooded roads, take the following into ac- count:

The water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork. Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING After driving through flooded zones, brak- ing effectiveness can decrease if the brake discs or pads are damp page 234.

CAUTION Driving through flooded areas may dam- age vehicle components such as the en- gine, transmission or electrical system. Whenever driving through water, the Start-Stop system must be switched off page 193.

Note Check the depth of the water before en- tering the flooded zone. Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or stop the engine. Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc- tion cause waves that could exceed your vehicle's critical height. Avoid driving through salt water (corro- sion) page 301.

Trips abroad

With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured that lead-free petrol is available throughout the journey page 272, Fuel types. Seek information about service station networks selling unleaded fuel. In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may not be available or the technical services may only be able to make limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will provide information about the technical preparation that your vehicle requires and also about necessary maintenance and repair possibili- ties.

CAUTION SEAT does not accept liability for any dam- age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

208

Driver assistance systems

Driver assistance systems

General notes

Safety advice

WARNING Responsibility for driving rests with the driver at all times. The drive assist systems are not a replacement for driver attention. Focus all your attention on driving and be prepared to intervene at all times. Use the drive assist systems only when conditions allow. The driving style must al- ways be suitable for the weather, visibility, road and traffic conditions. In order for drive assist systems to react correctly, sensors and cameras must oper- ate without limitations. Please read the notes on sensors and cameras in this chap- ter.

Note Keep in mind the specific rules of each country, especially when it comes to driv- ing, formation of an emergency corridor, braking distance, speed, parking position, wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re- sponsible for always complying with the specific regulations of each country. The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhe-

sives, additional headlights or similar items, as this could have a negative impact on the operation of the assistants. If the ve- hicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made to it, the operation of the assistants may be affected. The repair and adjustment of sensors and cameras requires special knowledge and tools. It is recommended to visit a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

System limits

WARNING Drive assist systems can not overcome the laws of physics. Depending on the cir- cumstances, a collision may not be avoida- ble. Warnings, notices and indicator lamps may not be displayed on time, or may be displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap- proaches too quickly. Corrective interventions by drive assist systems (e.g. interventions in the steering or brakes) may be insufficient or may never occur, depending on the circumstances. As a driver, you must be prepared to act at all times.

Note Due to the system's detection limits in the surroundings, the systems may not give warnings or intervene on time, or they might do so even if it is not desired. In addi- tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result, warn the driver in an unexpected manner. When the towing mode is selected, some assist systems may react with limitations, in an unusual way or may not be available. Keep in mind the instructions relating to the towing mode.

209

Driving

Drive assist sensors and cameras

Front radar

Fig. 139 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

Fig. 140 Detection area.

A radar sensor may be fitted to the front bumper of the vehicle Fig. 139. The front radar detects any objects in its detection

zone Fig. 140 and provides support for the following functions:

Front Assist page 216. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) page 219.

The radar can have a range of up to 120m (400ft) depending on road and weather con- ditions.

WARNING The visibility of the radar sensor can be im- paired by dirt or environmental influences such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC functions may stop working. The instrument panel displays the following message: No sensor vision! And the Front Assist un- available or ACC unavailable warning lights come on. Clean the sensor area on the bumper as indicated in page 303, Cleaning the ex- terior . When the radar sensor starts cor- rectly detecting again, the message disap- pears from the screen and the functions become available again.

CAUTION If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly ad- justed, the Front Assist system may give un- necessary warnings and apply the brakes inappropriately.

The operation of the radar can be affec- ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig- nal. This may occur, for example, in an en- closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works). The sensor may not be adjusted correct- ly if it receives an impact. This may com- promise the system's efficacy or discon- nect it. If you have the feeling that the ra- dar sensor is damaged or adjusted incor- rectly, switch off the Front Assist and ACC functions to avoid any damage. If this oc- curs have it adjusted.

Front camera

Fig. 141 On the windscreen: field of vision of the Lane Assist system.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with a front camera on the front windscreen Fig. 141. This camera detects

210

Driver assistance systems

lane boundaries (lines) to provide support for the following functions:

Lane Assist page 224. Travel Assist page 226.

CAUTION To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- tems, take the following points into consid- eration: Clean the field of vision of the camera regularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the camera. Check that the windscreen is not dam- aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- sion.

Rear radar

Fig. 142 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor zones.

Fig. 143 Sensor detection zones

The radar sensors are located on the left and right of the bumper and are not visible from the outside Fig. 142. The sensors monitor both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- hicle Fig. 143.

They support the following functions:

Lane departure warning (Side Assist) page 230. Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) page 232.

Automatic deactivation of supported func- tions The rear radar sensors deactivate automati- cally when, among other reasons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently cov- ered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display.

CAUTION The radar sensors on the rear bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least possibly having its functionality diminished. In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of snow and ice and do not cover it. The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by SEAT. The lane de- parture warning's functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used. The visibility of radar sensors may be af- fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or

211

Driving

dirt, among others. Clean the area in front of the sensors. Never use the blind spot detector or the parking assistant if the radar sensors are dirty.

Ultrasound sensors

The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen- sors to perform the following functions:

Park Assist page 240. Parking aid Plus page 249. Rear parking aid page 252.

CAUTION Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can modify the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the parking aid function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop. A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a cured or deformed number plate can cause false detections or a loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and

ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist.

Rear View Camera

Fig. 144 In the rear lid handle: location of the reverse assist camera.

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- sists the driver with reverse parking or ma- noeuvring. This provides support to the fol- lowing function:

Rear View Camera page 254.

WARNING Fitting a number plate frame may interfere with the view shown on the screen, as it may reduce the cameras field of vision.

CAUTION In order to guarantee good system oper- ation, keep the cameras clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lens. Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could damage the camera.

Cruise control system (CCS)

Introduction

The cruise control system (GRA) helps main- tain a constant speed set by you.

Speed range The cruise control system is available when driving in forward gear at a speed of over ap- prox. 20 km/h (15 mph).

212

Driver assistance systems

Temporarily switching off the cruise con- trol The saved speed can be exceeded at any time, e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control is suspended during acceleration and is then resumed with the saved speed.

Status display When the cruise control system is switched on, the instrument cluster display shows the saved speed and the system status:

It lights up grey

The cruise control system is switched on, but regula- tion is not active.

It lights up green

The cruise control system is switched on and regula- tion is active.

If there is no speed saved, the instrument cluster display shows instead of speed.

Changing gears As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, regulation is suspended and resumes once the gear change has been made.

WARNING If it is impossible to drive with sufficient braking distance and at a constant speed,

using the cruise control system may cause accidents and serious injuries may occur. Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. Only use the cruise control system on paved roads with a firm surface. Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- ditions. After use, always switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regula- ted against your wishes. It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions.

Operating the cruise control

Fig. 145 On the multifunction steering wheel: buttons to operate the speed limiter.

Connecting Press the button.

There is no speed saved and regulation is not yet operating.

Start regulation When the vehicle is moving, press the but- ton .

The cruise control system saves and regu- lates the current speed.

Adjusting the speed While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be adjusted:

+ 1 km/h (1 mph)

213

Driving

- 1 km/h (1 mph) + 10 km/h (5 mph) - 10 km/h (5 mph)

The cruise control system only operates the acceleration, it does not brake the vehicle.

Interrupting the adjustment Briefly press the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.

The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control Press the button.

The cruise control system resumes the saved speed and regulates it.

Switching off Press and hold the button .

The cruise control system switches off and the saved speed is deleted.

Switching off the speed limiter Press the button. Select the speed limiter on the instrument cluster display.

The cruise control system is switched off.

Troubleshooting

Temporarily switching off the cruise control

The control lamp switches on yellow.

Abnormal operation. Switch off the cruise control system and take the vehicle to a spe- cialist workshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect- edly If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long time. The vehicle has exceeded the saved speed for a long time. No forward gear has been selected. A brake assistance system has intervened, e.g. TCS or ESC. Front Assist has braked the vehicle. If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer- gency Assist and consult a specialised work- shop.

Speed limiter

Introduction

The speed limited helps the driver not to ex- ceed a set speed.

Speed range The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a programmed speed, from 30 km/h (20 mph) approx. and faster.

By selecting the speed limiter The speed limitation can be interrupted at any time by depressing the accelerator ped- al fully, beyond the point of resistance. As soon as the saved speed is exceeded, the green indicator light flashes and an audible warning signal sounds. The speed is stored.

The limiter is reactivated automatically after returning to less than the set speed.

Status display When the speed limiter is switched on, the in- strument cluster display shows the saved speed and the system status:

It lights up grey

The speed limiter is switched on but regulation is not active.

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

WARNING After use, always switch off the speed limit- er to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes.

214

Driver assistance systems

The speed limiter does not relieve the driver of their responsibility to drive at the appropriate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary. Using the speed limiter under adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed limiter when the status of the road and the weather conditions allow it.

Operating the speed limiter

Fig. 146 On the multifunction steering wheel: buttons to operate the speed limiter.

Connecting Press the button.

It does not take effect yet.

Start regulation When the vehicle is moving, press the but- ton .

The current speed is saved as a limit speed.

Adjusting the speed The programmed speed can be set:

+ 1 km/h (1 mph) - 1 km/h (1 mph) + 10 km/h (5 mph) - 10 km/h (5 mph)

Interrupting the adjustment Press the button.

The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control Press the button.

The limiter will re-activate as soon as the ve- hicle is moving at a speed lower than the saved one.

Switching off Press and hold the button .

The speed limiter switches off and the speed is deleted.

Switch to cruise control (GRA) or adaptive cruise control (ACC) Press the button. Observe the corresponding message on the instrument cluster display.

The speed limiter is switched off.

Troubleshooting

The speed limiter is not active.

The control lamp switches on yellow.

Malfunctions Switch off the speed limiter and go to a specialist workshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect- edly You have switched off the Electronic Stabili- zation Control (ESC). The brakes have overheated. Wait for the brakes to cool down and check the operation again. If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop.

For safety reasons, the speed limiter only switches off fully whenever the driver stops pressing the accelerator pedal or switches the system off manually.

215

Driving

Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)

Introduction

Fig. 147 On the instrument panel display: ad- vance warning indications.

The objective of the system is to prevent head-on collisions against objects that may be in the vehicles path or minimise the con- sequences of such impacts.

Depending on several factors and how criti- cal the situation is, the system operates in a staggered manner. First it warns the driver, and if the drivers reaction does not occur or is insufficient, it activates independent emer- gency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same lane travelling in the same direction, or with pedestrians crossing the vehicles path or

travelling in the same lane and direction. It may not activate in other hazard situations .

Front Assist is active between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depend- ing on a range of conditions, some of the functions described below are omitted to op- timize the behaviour of the system.

Front Assist is a driving assistance function that can never replace the drivers atten- tion.

Safety distance warning If the system detects that you are driving too close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the driver with this indication on the instrument panel display .

The timing of the warning varies according to other factors: driver behaviour and speed.

Advance warning If the system detects a possible collision with the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by means of an audible warning and an indica- tion on the instrument panel display Fig. 147.

The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possible emergency braking .

Critical warning If the driver fails to react to the advance warning, the system may actively intervene in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger of a colli- sion.

Automatic braking If the driver also fails to react to the critical warning, the system may initiate independ- ent emergency braking by progressively in- creasing the braking in accordance with how critical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assistance sys- tem The system may detect that the driver is not braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it will increase the braking intensity.

The system cannot prevent a collision, al- though it can significantly minimise the con- sequences by reducing the speed and the force of the impact.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 87.

WARNING Front Assist cannot change the laws of physics or replace the driver in terms of

216

Driver assistance systems

keeping control of the vehicle and reacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING Following a Front Assist emergency warn- ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- tion and try to avoid the collision as appli- cable. If the Front Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership. Always adapt your speed and distance away from the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- dents and serious injuries. In complex driving situations, Front Assist may issue warnings and intervene in brak- ing unnecessarily. If the operation of the Front Assist is im- paired by dirt or because the radar sensor has lost its settings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inop- portunely in the braking. The Front Assist does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or ap- proaching head-on down the same lane.

The Front Assist does not react to pedes- trians walking head-on in the same lane. The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.

Note When Front Assist is connected, the indi- cations of other functions on the screen may be hidden. When the Front Assist causes a braking, the brake pedal is harder. Automatic interventions by the Front As- sist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. The Front Assist may brake the vehicle until it stops completely. However, the brake system does not halt the vehicle per- manently. Use the foot brake! If the Front Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several times unnecessarily), switch it off.

Operation of the emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so too are the advance warning and the distance warning functions.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist activated. Exceptions page 218, Deacti- vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol- lowing situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist can be deactivated or activated as follows: Using the infotainment system with the but- ton > Driver assistance page 92.

When Front Assist is deactivated, the indica- tion will be displayed on the instrument cluster.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning (advance warning) The advance warning can be switched off and on in the infotainment system using but- ton > Driver assistance page 92.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping advance warning active.

Depending on the vehicles infotainment sys- tem the advance warning function may be adapted in the following modes:

Advance Medium Delayed

217

Driving

Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in Medium mode.

Switching distance warning on and off The distance warning can be switched on and off in the infotainment system using the button > Driver assistance page 92.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distance warning active.

Deactivating Front Assist tempora- rily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist should be deactivated due to the system's limitations:

When the vehicle is to be towed. If the vehicle is on a test bed. When the radar sensor is damaged. If the radar sensor receives a violent im- pact. If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. If the radar sensor is temporarily covered by an accessory.

When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto transportation.

System limitations

Fig. 148 On the instrument panel display: ini- tial system self-calibration indication.

Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the reactions may be inappropriate from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the Front Assist not to react or to do so too late: In the first few instants of driving after switching on the ignition, due to the systems initial auto-calibration. During this period, a status icon Fig. 148is displayed.

If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- aged. If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. On taking tight bends or complex paths. Pressing the accelerator all the way down. If the ASR has been disconnected or the ESC activated in Sport mode page 239. If the ESC is controlling. If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged. If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works. If the vehicle is reversing. In case of snow or heavy rain. In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- bikes. Misaligned vehicles. Vehicles crossing the other's path. Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- tion. Loads and accessories of other vehicles that protrude over the sides, backwards or over the top.

218

Driver assistance systems

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con- trol

Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a constant speed set by the driver. When ap- proaching another vehicle in front, the ACC detects it and adapts the speed automatical- ly, maintaining a distance set by the driver.

Does my vehicle have ACC? Your vehicle has ACC if it has a configuration menu in the infotainment system page 92 and if it has the ACC function buttons on the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 149.

Speed range ACC regulates speeds between 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph).

If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gear- box, the ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill if a vehicle in front of it stops.

If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, you must pay attention to speed and gear changes. The ACC is deactivated if the speed is too low (less than 30 km/h) of the engine RPM is too low or high.

Driver intervention prompt ACC is subject to certain limitations in- herent to the system. This means that the driver will have to control the speed and distance from other vehicles in cer- tain situations. In this case, the instru- ment cluster display will tell you to in- tervene by applying the brake, and an audio warning will be played.

Radar sensors The ACC uses the front radar technology. Read its maintenance instructions and infor- mation about its limitations page 209.

WARNING The ACCs technology cannot overcome the system's inherent limitations or change the laws of physics. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious acci- dents and injuries. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Always be prepared to brake or acceler- ate. If you press the accelerator pedal the ACC will stop working. Therefore, it will not brake or request any braking intervention. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions.

Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or on roads that are steep, with lots of curves or slippery. Never use ACC when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. The system does not react to stationary obstacles (such as a traffic jam queue). Re- act soon enough to avoid a hazardous sit- uation. The system does not react to people, ani- mals or vehicles that are crossing or ap- proaching in the opposite direction. If you are driving with a spare wheel fit- ted, the ACC system could automatically switch off. Switch off the system when starting off. Brake immediately if the ACC does not slow down enough. Brake immediately when a driver inter- vention instruction is displayed on the in- strument cluster screen. If the vehicle continues to move involun- tarily after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle.

Note If the ACC does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised workshop. Visit- ing a SEAT dealership is recommended.

219

Driving

ACC operation

Fig. 149 On the multifunction steering wheel: buttons to operate the ACC

Connecting Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The ACC does not regulate anything yet (standby).

Start regulation To start regulation, press the button Fig. 149.

The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos- est speed within the valid range (30-210 km/h), as the cruise speed.

With manual transmission, the gear lever must be in any gear except first and reverse, and the speed must be higher than approxi- mately 30 km/h (18 mph). On vehicles with

automatic transmission, the gear lever must be in the D, S or M position.

Depending on the driving situation, the fol- lowing indicator lamps come on:

It lights up green

The ACC is activea).

a) Only on analogue instrument clusters.

It lights up greena)

ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front.

a) It lights up white on the analogue instrument clus- ter.

It lights up greena)

ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.

a) It lights up white on the analogue instrument clus- ter.

When the ACC is in standby, the indicator lamps light up grey.

Setting speed To program the speed, press the or Fig. 149 buttons to the desired speed. The speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5 mph).

When the ACC is active, the button can be pressed to increase the desired speed by 1

km/h (1 mph). You can then press to de- crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph).

Setting your distance level The distance can be set to one of five levels, from very short to very long:

Press the button and then the button or Fig. 149. Alternatively, press the button as many times as necessary to set the desired dis- tance.

Keep in mind each countrys regulations on minimum braking distances.

Suspend regulation (standby) Briefly press the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.

The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed and distance are saved.

If the ESC or ASR is disconnected page 239, the ACC is automatically sus- pended.

Reinstating the cruise control Press the button. The ACC regulates to the last speed and distance setting. OR: Press the button to use the current speed.

220

Driver assistance systems

Switching off Press and hold the button . The set speed is cleared.

Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACC While driving with the ACC switched on, the driver can increase speed by pressing the accelerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen- ded until you release the accelerator pedal .

Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey In the Infotainment system, you can pre-se- lect the distance level when connecting the ACC from:

Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very long using the Infotainment system: > Driv- er assistance > ACC page 92.

Changing the driving profile In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving profile selected can have an influence on the ACCs acceleration and braking behaviour page 204.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- haviour of the ACC can also be affected if any of the following drive profiles are selec- ted in the infotainment system in Drive assist.

ACC settings will be the same as those in the SEAT Drive Profile.

WARNING Before driving off, check that the road is clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob- stacles on the road. This could cause an accident and serious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

CAUTION If you increase speed using the accelerator pedal, the ACC may not be able to safely adjust the speed of the distance due to the limitations of the system. Be prepared to react if required by the situation.

Status display

Fig. 150 On the instrument panel display: ACC active.

Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if the distance to the vehicle is adjusted. Selected distance level 2.

This information can be displayed on the central panel of the Assists view, or in the left hand information profile page 68. If these views are not selected, it will be automatical- ly displayed in the lower central part of the instrument cluster in a simplified manner.

The set speed will be displayed next to the function status indicator described in page 220, Start regulation.

1

2

221

Driving

Special driving situations

Fig. 151 On the instrument panel display: ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

Be aware of the limitations and warnings de- scribed at the beginning of this chapter. in Introduction on page 219.

Avoid undertaking on the right1)

If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that is travelling at a speed slower than that set by the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the comfort limits of the system to avoid passing it on the right Fig. 151.

You can cancel this regulation by changing the set speed or by pressing the accelerator pedal.

The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.

Overtaking When the turn signal is switched on for over- taking, the ACC reduces the distance from the vehicle in front to help with the overtaking manoeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be exceeded.

The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.

Stop&Go function 3 Valid for: vehicles with an automatic gearbox

The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill (0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops.

The ACC remains active and the message ACC ready to start is displayed on the in- strument cluster for a few seconds. During this time, the vehicle will move off again if the vehicle in front moves forwards.

If the vehicle in front does not move off, the vehicle can be kept at a standstill with the status ACC ready to start by pressing the brake.

The system can only keep the car stopped for a few seconds. After this, the Brake warn- ing will be displayed and an audio warning will be played. Press the brake pedal. The ve- hicle may start moving forward if you do not do this Accident hazard!

The ACC is deactivated while stopped in the following cases:

If the vehicle stops for several minutes. If a door is opened.

WARNING If the message ACC ready to start is dis- played on the instrument cluster display and the vehicle in front moves off, your ve- hicle will move off automatically. In this case, any obstacles in the road may not be detected. This may cause serious acci- dents and injuries. Always check the road before moving off, and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if necessary.

1) Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left hand side of the road.

222

Driver assistance systems

ACC system limitations

Fig. 152 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclist ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 153 Vehicle changing lanes. One ve- hicle turning and another stationary.

The limits of the ACC system mean that it is not appropriate in all situations in Intro- duction on page 219.

SEAT does not recommend using the function in the following cases :

Heavy rain, snow or fog. When going through tunnels. In sections with roadworks. On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain roads. On off-road routes. In covered car parks.

On roads with embedded metal objects such as train or tram tracks. On roads with loose gravel.

Pay special attention when using ACC in the following situations:

On curves The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front on a curve, or may regulate the distance from vehicles in other lanes Fig. 152 .

Vehicles outside the sensor zone In the following situations the ACC may not react, or may react slowly or inappropriately:

Vehicles that are not aligned while driving or that are outside the sensor's detection area, such as motorcycles Fig. 152 Vehicles that move into your lane, a short distance from your vehicle Fig. 153 . Vehicles with loads or accessories that pro- trude from the sides, rear or roof.

Objects that are not detected The ACC function only detects and reacts to vehicles moving in the same direction. There- fore it does not detect:

People Animals

223

Driving

Vehicles travelling in the opposite direction or crossing the road. Other stationary obstacles

The ACC does not react to stationary vehi- cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a sta- tionary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to the second vehicle Fig. 153 .

WARNING Using the ACC in the above situations can cause serious accidents and injuries, and you could break the law.

Problems and solutions

ACC not available

The indicator lamp lights up yellow:

The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor- rectly. Take into account the warnings descri- bed in this section page 210 There is a fault or defect. Turn off the vehi- cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few minutes. If the problem persists, consult a special- ised workshop.

The ACC does not work as expected Make sure that the conditions are met for the radar sensor to operate properly page 210. If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au- tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and check the operation again. Unusual noises during automatic ACC braking are normal and do not indicate any anomalies.

The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react: The accelerator or brake is depressed. No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear R. The vehicle is reversing. ESC is operating. The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty. The RPM is too high or too low. The parking brake is applied. Driving on an excessive slope.

Lane Assist

Introduction

The Lane Assist System helps the driver stay in his/her lane within the physical lim- its of the system. This function is not suita- ble and is not designed to keep the vehicle automatically in the lane.

Using the camera located in the windscreen, the Lane Assist system detects the limits (lane lines) dividing the lanes in which the vehicle is travelling. If the vehicle gets too close to the detected lane limits, the system alerts the driver through a corrective motion of the steering wheel. The driver can cancel the steering corrective action at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signals activated, given that the Lane Assist system understands that a lane change is required.

System limits Use the Lane Assist system only on large, well-maintained motorways and highways.

The system is not available under the follow- ing conditions:

The driving speed allowed is below approx. 55 km/h (30 mph). The system has not detected any lane lines.

224

Driver assistance systems

On tight bends. Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.

WARNING The intelligent technology in the Lane As- sist system cannot change the limits im- posed by the laws of physics and by the very nature of the system. Careless or un- controlled use of the Lane Assist system may cause accidents and injury. The sys- tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ness or manoeuvres when driving. Always adapt your speed and the dis- tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi- bility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so it can be turned at any time. The responsibility of staying in the lane is al- ways the driver's. The Lane Assist system does not detect all road markings. The road surfaces, road structures or objects in poor condition can be incorrectly detected as road markings under certain circumstances by the Lane Assist system. Immediately counter any un- wanted intervention of the system. Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary if the traffic situation permits. In the following situations there may be undesired interventions of the system or it may be that the system does not intervene

at all. In these situations, special attention is required from the driver and, where ap- propriate, the temporary deactivation of the lane assist warning system: In very sporty driving situations. In adverse weather conditions and

roads in poor condition. When passing through areas undergo-

ing works. Before gradient changes of grade and

river beds. Always observe the vehicle surroundings carefully and drive proactively. When the area of vision of the camera becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane Assist system function can be affec- ted.

Control lamp

or It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

or It lights up yellow

The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectifica- tion of the steering.

Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to

check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 87.

Driving with the Lane Assist System

Fig. 154 On the instrument panel display: indi- cations of the Lane Assist System.

Lane line detected. The system inter- venes assisting on the represented side. Lane line detected. The system does not intervene.

Switching the lane assist system on or off In some countries, the Lane Assist System is always activated when the ignition is switch- ed on. The connection status is shown in the Assistants menu of the Infotainment system

1

2

225

Driving

or the assistant systems menu after pressing the corresponding button. The Lane Assist system can be activated and deactivated in these menus.

The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in- tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35 mph) and if it has detected the lane limits (system status: active). The control lamp emits a green light. When the system inter- venes by rectifying the direction, the control lamp emits a yellow light.

If the control lamp of the instrument panel display is off, it means that the Lane Assist system is connected but not ready to inter- vene or it is disconnected.

When you activate a turn signal, the system temporarily goes into a passive state in order to allow manual lane change.

An energetic rotation or rectification of the steering wheel by the driver causes the sys- tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.

Driver intervention prompt If the steering is not corrected manually, the system prompts the driver through an indica- tion on the instrument panel display and acoustic warnings.

If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the system switches to a passive state.

Regardless of the steering manoeuvres, through an indication on the instrument panel

display and acoustic warnings, the driver is also prompted to drive through the centre of the lane if the steering correction lasts more than reasonable.

Steering wheel vibration The following situations may result in a steer- ing wheel vibration:

The lane ceases to be recognised during a sudden intervention in the direction of the system.

It is also possible to select steering wheel vi- bration in the Assistants menu of the infotain- ment system. In this case, when a vehicle with Lane Assist switched on crosses over a detec- ted lane marking, the steering wheel will vi- brate.

Troubleshooting

Error message, the system disconnects Clean the windscreen. page 301 Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vision.

System behaviour is different than expec- ted Clean the field of vision of the camera reg- ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snow and ice.

Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- era. Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vision. Do not mount objects on the steering wheel.

In the event of doubts or queries, go to a spe- cialised workshop.

Driving Assist (Travel Assist)

Introduction

The driving assist (Travel Assist) combines adaptive cruise control (ACC) and adap- tive lane guidance. Within the limitations of the system, the vehicle can maintain a distance from the vehicle in front that is preselected by the driver and remain in the preferred position within the lane.

Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap- tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. Therefore, carefully read the information about the ACC page 219 and the Lane As- sist page 224 and take into account the limitations of the systems and the indications given in the information.

226

Driver assistance systems

Speed range Travel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap- prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx. 210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case of the adaptive lane guidance function, be- tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250 km/h (approx. 155 mph).

Driving with Travel Assist Travel Assist automatically controls the ac- celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering. In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limita- tions, decelerate the vehicle until it stops be- hind another that stops and automatically starts again.

You can override assisted adjustment at all times.

How to know if the vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the multifunction steering wheel has the button Fig. 157.

Driver intervention prompt If you remove your hands from the steering wheel, after a few seconds the system asks you to take over the steering with an indica- tion on the instrument panel display and acoustic warnings.

WARNING The Travel Assist smart technology cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. If Travel assist is used negli- gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Bear in mind the system limitations and the indications regarding the control of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. Do not use Travel Assist offroad or on roads where the surface is not firm. Travel Assist has been designed for use on paved roads only. Travel Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane. Brake immediately if Travel Assist does not slow down enough. Brake immediately when a braking mes- sage is displayed on the instrument panel screen.

Brake when, after an indication to brake, the vehicle rolls without it being desired. Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times, to ensure you have control over the steering at all times. The driver is al- ways responsible for keeping the vehicle in its own lane. If possible, do not wear gloves while driv- ing. The system could interpret this as no driving activity. If driver intervention is requested on the instrument panel display, immediately re- sume control of the vehicle. Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself.

227

Driving

Indications on the instrument panel display

Fig. 155 On the instrument panel display: indi- cation with active adjustment.

Fig. 156 On the instrument panel display: con- trol lamps.

Displays on the screen Fig. 155

The adaptive lane guidance function is active.

1

Distance set.

In addition, depending on the equipment, control lamps indicate the status of the sys- tem on the instrument panel display:

Fig. 156 Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol and adaptive lane guidance function are active. Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol active and adaptive lane guidance function passive. Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol passive and adaptive lane guidance function active. Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol and adaptive lane guidance function are passive. Inactive Travel Assist.

Depending on the equipment, more details may be displayed on the instrument cluster, such as dashed lines or other vehicles on the road.

2

A

B

C

D

E

Operating Travel Assist

Fig. 157 Left side of the multifunction steering wheel: buttons for operating Travel Assist.

Connecting Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The control lamp will light up green. The following warning is also displayed on the in- strument panel screen: The Travel Assist maintains the current speed and the preset distance from the vehicle in front. At the same time, if it detects road markings it keeps the vehicle in the lane by moving the steering wheel.

Interrupting the adjustment Briefly press the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.

The set distance remains saved.

228

Driver assistance systems

Making other adjustments For all else, Travel Assist is operated like the ACC page 220.

Troubleshooting

Travel Assist is not available or does not work as expected The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele- vant warning is also displayed on the instru- ment panel screen.

There is a fault in the sensors. Check the causes and solutions described in page 210. The system limits are exceeded. If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop.

Take the wheel The warning lamp comes on white or red, de- pending on the urgency of the intervention. A message is also displayed.

You released the steering wheel for a few seconds. Take hold of the steering wheel and take control of the vehicle. The system limits have been reached. Take hold of the steering wheel and take control of the vehicle.

Travel Assist disconnects automatically Vehicles without Emergency Assist: You have released the steering wheel for a long period.

Abnormal operation. Contact a specialised workshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect- edly Vehicles without lane departure warning: You have turned on the turn signal.

Side Assist with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

Introduction

The lane departure warning (LCA) helps de- tect traffic that is at the rear of the vehicle.

The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helps the driver when backing out of a parallel parking spot and when manoeuvring.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance (RCTA) included cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Accidents and severe injury may

occur if the blind spot detection system or the rear cross traffic alert are used negli- gently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time. Pay attention to the indicator lamps that may come on in the external rear view mir- rors and on the instrument cluster, and fol- low any instructions they may give. The lane departure warning could react to any special constructions that might be present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high or irregular dividers. This may cause erro- neous warnings. Never use the lane departure warning on unpaved roads. The lane departure warn- ing has been designed for use on paved roads. Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings. The control lamps of the lane departure warning may have limited functionality due to solar radiation.

229

Driving

Note If the blind spot detector with parking as- sistant does not work as described in this chapter, stop using it and contact a speci- alised workshop.

Control lamp

Fig. 158 Control lamp of the lane departure warning.

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

It lights up

It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning is activated and ready to operate, i.e. when activating the system.

It lights up continuously: the lane departure warning has detected a vehicle in the blind spot.

Flashes

A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane and the turn signal has been engaged in the direction of the detected vehicle .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist page 224, a warning to switch lanes will also ap- pear even though the turn signal has not been en- gaged (Lane Assist Plus page 231).

The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approxi- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

If there are no indications from the control lamp of the lane departure warning, this means that the lane departure warning has not detected any other vehicles at the rear area .

When the exterior lighting is low, the intensity with which the control lamps come on is dim- med. The user can modify the intensity of the control lamps with up to 5 levels in the info- tainment system menu.

WARNING Failure to pay attention to any lit warning lamps and the corresponding messages could cause serious accidents and injuries. Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- sages. Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- responding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Lane departure warning (Side As- sist)

The lane departure warning uses radar sen- sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle page 8. The system does this by measur- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The lane departure warning will not work at speeds of less than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses optical signals in the external rear view mir- rors to notify the driver.

The lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- tween two lanes, the indications may be in- correct. Furthermore, the system can detect

230

Driver assistance systems

vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if there are any), and can also detect station- ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an incorrect indication.

Indication on the exterior mirror The control lamp provides an indication on the corresponding side regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp on the left-hand side indicates the traffic situation to the rear left of the vehicle, and the control lamp on the right-hand side indicates the traffic situa- tion to the rear right of the vehicle Fig. 158.

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or windows with tinted film, the indications of the external mirrors may not be seen clearly or correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- hesives or other similar materials.

Lane assist Plus.

The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by activating the Lane Assist page 224 and Side Assist functions. In this case its functions are expanded as described below.

If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu- vre in a potential critical situation:

The lamp flashes in the corresponding rear- view mirror even though the turn signal has not been activated. The steering wheel vibrates to warn the driver of the risk of collision. torque is applied to correct the steering and return the vehicle to its lane.

Driving situations

Fig. 159 Schematic representation: Passing situation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi- cation from the blind spot detector in the left- hand external mirror.

Fig. 160 Schematic representation: Situa- tion of passing and then moving into the right- hand lane. Indication from the blind spot de- tector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will be displayed in the external mirror Fig. 159 (arrow) or Fig. 160 (arrow):

When being overtaken by another vehicle Fig. 159 . When passing another vehicle Fig. 160 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid- erably higher speed, no indication will be dis- played.

231

Driving

The faster a vehicle approaches, the sooner an indication will be displayed in the exterior mirror, because Side Assist takes into account the different in speed compared to other ve- hicles. Thus even though the distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indication will appear sooner in some cases and later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the system In some situations the lane departure warning may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ly. I.e. in the following situations:

on tight bends; in the case of lanes with different widths; in areas with significant gradient changes; in adverse weather conditions; in the case of special constructions to the side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid- ers.

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

Fig. 161 Schematic representation of the rear cross traffic alert assistant: zone monitored around the vehicle while leaving a parking space.

Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear bumper page 210 to monitor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of a parallel parking space or as it is being man- oeuvred, for example in very low visibility con- ditions.

When the system detects a relevant vehicle on the road that is approaching the rear of the vehicle Fig. 161, an acoustic alarm may sound if the relevance so requires it.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on infotainment system display. This signal is dis-

played in the form of a red or yellow strip at the back of the image of the vehicle on the in- fotainment system screen. This strip displays the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is approaching in transverse direction1).

Automatic braking to reduce damages If the rear cross traffic alert detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehicle and the driver does not step on the brake, the system will engage the brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto- matically engaging the brakes to reduce any damage. The automatic intervention on the brakes takes place when driving in reverse at approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph). After detecting that the vehicle is stationary, the system keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam- age, the system will not be able to automati- cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking by stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system.

232

Driver assistance systems

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. The system should never be used in limi- ted visibility conditions or complicated traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing multiple lanes. Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- cle's surroundings, since the system often fails to detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians. The rear cross traffic alert itself will not brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

Managing the assist systems

Enabling and disabling the assist systems The blind spot detector with parking assistant can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistants menu on the dash panel display using the steering wheel controls. If the vehi- cle is equipped with a multifunction camera, it can also be accessed by means of the as- sistants systems key located on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu. Side Assist Rear cross traffic alert

If the verification box on the instrument panel or the infotainment system is checked , the functionality will be automatically activated when switching on the ignition.

When the Side Assist is ready to operate, the indicator turns on briefly on the exterior rear view mirrors as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- ment in the system will remain active.

Trailer mode Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert are automatically deactivated and cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted tow-bar is electrically connected to a trailer or similar device.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a message is displayed on the instrument pan- el display indicating that the Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert are switched off. Once the trailer has been unhooked from the vehicle, if you want to use the Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert, you will have to re- activate them in the corresponding menu.

If the tow-bar is not factory fitted, Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert should be

switched off manually when driving with a trailer.

233

Driving

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low page 284 or fault in the brake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Handbrake applied page 236. The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- leased.

WARNING When the ignition is switched on, the sta- tus of the brake system and the brake as- sist functions is automatically checked. The control lights on the instrument cluster light up briefly and then turn off again. If a warning light stays on permanently, there is a fault. Seek qualified technical assis- tance immediately. If the brake warning lamp does not go out or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there is a risk of an accident page 284, Brake fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lights up to- gether with the ABS lamp this could be due to an ABS fault. When this function fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi- cle may skid, with the danger of losing con- trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.

Information about the brakes

New brake pads For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum braking capacity, and need to be run in first. However, you can compen- sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by applying more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid overloading the brakes while running them in.

Wear The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a particular problem in urban traffic and short stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking force and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem- perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be produced when braking.

Wet roads or road salt In certain situations (for example, on driving through flooded areas, in severe downpours or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- tion could be delayed if the discs and pads are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipers activated, the brake pads will briefly touch the brake discs. This takes place, although unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals to improve the response time of the brakes when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the discs and pads can be removed by gently apply- ing the brakes a few times.

Corrosion There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a moderately high speed .

234

Braking and parking

Fault in the brake system If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- member that you will have to apply more pressure on the brake pedal and allow for longer stopping distances.

Low brake fluid level Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.

Brake servo The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works only when the engine is running.

WARNING Any anomaly in the brake system can in- crease the braking distance, with the re- sulting risk of an accident. New brake pads and discs must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced braking capacity may be offset by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. If you are driving on roads which have been salted, braking effectiveness may be decreased.

Brakes can overheat if used excessively on slopes. Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and change down into a lower gear or range. Therefore, using the engine brake relieves the brakes. Gentle continuous braking causes the brakes to overheat and the braking dis- tance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately. Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake system only in a suitable traffic situa- tion. Do not put other road users in danger: there is risk of causing an accident. Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active. If the brake is subjected to high stresses, vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys- tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of the brakes. Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please read the relevant in- structions.

CAUTION Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not neces- sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-

sulting in longer stopping distances and greater wear. Before driving down a long, steep gradi- ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se- lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Note If the brake servo is out of action, for ex- ample when the car is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal to make up for the lack of servo assistance. If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac- cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not obstructed, other- wise the brakes can overheat.

235

Driving

Handbrake

Fig. 162 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehicle from accidentally moving. Apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake Pull the handbrake lever up Fig. 162.

Releasing the handbrake Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-

lease knob in the direction of the arrow Fig. 162 and guide the handbrake lever down fully .

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, to avoid driving off while the brake is on .

WARNING Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi- cle when it is in motion. The braking dis- tance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of accident! Failure to fully lower the handbrake lever can affect the operation of the system, and can also cause heating and wear of the rear brakes.

CAUTION Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. In addition, engage first or rear gear in the gradient function, or set the selection lever to P.

Hill driving assistant 3 Valid for vehicles: with ESC

The hill driving assistant helps the driver to move off and upward on a hill, both forwards and backwards, when the vehicle is station- ary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap- proximately two seconds after the foot is tak- en off the brake pedal, to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is started. During these 2 seconds, the driver has enough time to re- lease the clutch pedal and accelerate with- out the vehicle moving and without having to

use the handbrake, making start-up easier, more comfortable and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

being on a ramp or hill/slope, driver door closed, vehicle completely stationary, engine running and foot on the brake, having a gear engaged or being in neutral for a manual gearbox, or with the selector lever at positions D/S or R for an automatic gearbox.

WARNING If you do not start the vehicle immediate- ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle may roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately. If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately. When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back when starting off, hold the brake ped- al down for a few seconds before starting off.

Note The Official Service or a specialist work- shop can tell you if your vehicle is equip- ped with this system.

236

Braking and parking

Stabilisation and brake as- sistance systems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by the system. The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the ABS fails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

Fault in the ASR or disconnection caused by the sys- tem.

Flashes

ASR working.

It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode page 239.

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

WARNING When the ignition is switched on, the status of the brake system and the brake assist functions is automatically checked. The control lights on the instrument cluster light up briefly and then turn off again. If a warning light stays on permanently, there is a fault. Seek qualified technical assis- tance immediately.

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces the tendency to skid and improves the stabili- ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC detects critical handling situations, such as vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle by braking individual wheels or by reducing the engine torque. The warning lamp will flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is intervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system (ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the traction control system (ASR), electronic dif- ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control (XDS).

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by changing the torque.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin is desirable page 239.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- der braking until the vehicle has reached a virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal pulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi- fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- verely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) The brake assist system can reduce the re- quired braking distance. The braking force is automatically boosted if you press the brake pedal quickly in an emergency. You must keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR) In the event of wheelspin, the traction control system reduces the engine torque to match the amount of grip available. This helps the car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gradient.

237

Driving

Electronic differential lock (EDL) When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel and directs the power to the other driven wheel. This function is active up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve- hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- matically brake the towing vehicle within the limits of the system and mitigate the sway. Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available in all countries page 262.

Electronic engine torque management (XDS) When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re- ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque delivered to the inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other

hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This can cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this case the front axle, which results in under- steer or lengthening of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess driving torque of that wheel. This means that the requested trajectory is much more precise.

XDS works in combination with the ESC and is always active, even when ASR is disconnec- ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis- connected.

Multi-collision brake The multi-collision brake consists of automat- ic braking activated by the Airbag control unit. It is activated when, in the event of an accident, the Airbag control unit detects de- celerations above the activation level, and braking is managed by the ESC system.

In the event of an accident, the multi-collision brake can help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of skidding during the accident and causing other collisions.

The following actions control automatic brak- ing during the accident:

When the driver presses the accelerator, the automatic braking does not take place.

When the braking pressure through press- ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- tems braking pressure the vehicle will brake automatically. Multi-collision braking will not be available if there is an anomaly in the ESC system.

WARNING Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet ground can result in loss of vehicle control and serious injury to the driver and passen- gers. The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron- ic torque control system cannot exceed the limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al- ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery roads. If you notice the systems cutting in, you should reduce your speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not be encouraged to take risks by the presence of more safety sys- tems. If you do, an accident may occur. Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive fast, espe- cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and the electronic torque control sys- tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci- dents! Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- faces (for example, icy or snow-covered). Despite the control systems, the driven

238

Braking and parking

wheels could spin, affecting the stability of the vehicle: risk of accident!

Note The ABS and ASR will only operate cor- rectly if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to re- duce engine power when this is not desired. The regulating processes of the systems can make noises due to their operation. If the warning lamp or lights up, there could be a fault page 86. Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine, brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may affect the operation of the ABS, ASR and EDS.

Connecting and disconnecting the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started, and only works when the engine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR function should only be switched off in situations in which traction is insufficient.

Depending on the finishes and versions, there is the possibility of disconnecting only the ASR or activating the ESC in Sport mode.

Disconnecting and connecting the ASR The ASR can be switched off and on using the infotainment system page 88. In vehi- cles with a driver information system the cor- responding indication will be displayed.

When the ASR is disconnected, the control warning light lights up on the instrument cluster.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in Sport mode In Sport mode, the ESC can be discon- nected and connected using the infotainment system page 88. In vehicles with a driver information system the corresponding indica- tion will be displayed.

When Sport mode is turned on, ESC inter- ventions to stabilise the vehicle, and anti-slip regulation (ASR) are limited. In addition, the control lamp lights up on the instrument pan- el.

WARNING The ESC Sport mode should be activated only when traffic conditions and the ability of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!

With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited to allow for a sporti- er drive. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could skid.

Note If the ASR is disconnected or the Sport mode is selected, cruise control will be switched off.

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require- ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park- ing the vehicle:

Park the vehicle on a suitable surface . Apply the handbrake page 236. For an automatic gearbox, move the selec- tor lever to position P. Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.

239

Driving

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with you.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines Before switching off the engine, rotate the steering wheel so that if the vehicle should move, it will be held by the kerb.

On slopes, turn the front wheels so that they are against the edge of the kerb. Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of the road.

WARNING Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel or flammable materials. Do not leave passengers inside a closed vehicle, they may not be able to open doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the possibility of a rescue. Children should not be left alone in the vehicle. They could tamper with the hand- brake or the gears, which could cause the vehicle to move without control. Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Note In vehicles with automatic transmission, the key can only be removed from the ignition when the lever is in position P.

Help with parking and ma- noeuvring

Assisted parking system (Park Assist)

Introduction

The Park Assist system is an additional ParkPilot function page 247 and helps the driver to:

find a suitable parking space, select a parking mode, park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- dicular and parallel spaces, park driving forwards in suitable perpendic- ular spaces, exit a parking space driving forwards from a parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- tory infotainment system, the front, rear and side areas are represented, and the position of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver .

240

Help with parking and manoeuvring

WARNING The technology used in the park assist sys- tem involves a series of limitations inherent in the actual system and in the use of ultra- sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at least correctly, these objects or people wearing such clothes. Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- ted by external sound sources. In certain circumstances this may prevent them from detecting people or objects. The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not reg- istered. Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the ultrasound sensors do not detect small children, animals or certain objects in all situations.

WARNING Quick turns of the steering wheel when parking or exiting a parking space with Park Assist can cause serious injury. Do not hold the steering wheel during manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space until the system requests it. Doing so disa- bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trail- er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle. Retrofitting of certain accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter- fere with the operation of the Park Assist system and cause damage. The Park Assist system uses as a refer- ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not damaged while parking. If necessa- ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do

not apply it directly unless very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm. A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the reg- istration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause: False detections. The sensors to lose visibility. Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking. If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- aged, the area corresponding to that group of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot be activated until the fault is cor- rected. However, you can still use the sen- sors of the other bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a spe- cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Note In order to guarantee good system oper- ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other ob- jects. Certain sources of noise, such as rough asphalt or paving stones and the noise of other vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- ings. The presence of metal objects can al- so affect the manoeuvre.

241

Driving

In order to become familiar with the sys- tem and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice operating the Park Assist system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

Description of the parking assist system

Fig. 163 In the centre console: button to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist system are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, the button Fig. 163 to switch the system on and off and the mes- sages on the instrument panel display.

Prerequisites for parking The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 239.

Speed when passing next to the parking space (parallel parking): do not exceed ap- prox. 40 km/h (25 mph). Speed when passing next to the parking space (angle parking): do not exceed approx. 20 km/h (12 mph). Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me- tres when driving past the parking space. Space length (parallel parking): vehicle length + 0.8 meters. Space width (angle parking): vehicle width + 0.8 meters. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when parking.

Requirements for leaving the parking space (only for parallel parking) The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 239. Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in- terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space in any of the following cases:

Press the button. The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h (4 mph). The driver takes hold of the steering wheel. The parking manoeuvre does not end within 6 minutes from the activation of automatic steering. There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable). ASR is switched off. ASR or ESC intervene with regulation. The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that none of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.

Special characteristics The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. For exam- ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, a brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to change between forward and reverse gears (depending on the case). In successive ma- noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to change gears, at the latest, when the contin- uous audible signal is given (object present at a distance of 30 cm) by Park Pilot.

242

Help with parking and manoeuvring

When the Park Assist system turns the steer- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in- strument panel also displays the symbol . Keep the brake pedal depressed while the symbol remains on the dash panel display to turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This way, the system will require fewer manoeu- vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer mode The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket page 256 is electrically connected to a trailer.

After changing a wheel If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correct- ly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place during driving. Making turns slow- ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) for a few minutes may contribute to this adaptation process in Introduction on page 241.

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 164 On the instrument panel display: view of the parking assist system with reduced view.

Fig. 165 On the instrument panel display: indi- cation of parking modes.

Parking assist has the following 3 parking modes:

Reverse parallel parking. Reverse angle parking. Forward angle parking.

Selecting a parking mode after passing in front of the space After activating the Park Assist system and af- ter detecting a parking space, the display on the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the parking mode automatically. The selected mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- play Fig. 164. The reduced display of other possible parking modes is also shown Fig. 165. If the mode selected by the sys- tem does not correspond to the desired mode, you can select another mode by pressing the button Fig. 163.

The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 242. Press the button. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display and the reduced display shows another parking mode it can be changed to. Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- wards the side of the road where you are parking. The instrument panel displays the side corresponding to the road. By default, if

243

Driving

the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in the direction of traffic. If necessary, press the button again to change to the next parking mode. Once you have switched to all possible parking modes, if the button is pressed again, the system switches off. Press the button again to switch the sys- tem back on. Follow the instructions displayed on the in- strument panel while paying attention to traf-

fic and drive the vehicle past the parking space.

Special case of perpendicular parking space to park forwards without driving past first The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 242. Drive forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle.

Press the button once. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display without reduced display. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 241.

244

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 166 On the instrument panel display: paral- lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park- ing position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 167 On the instrument panel display: angle parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.

Message to move forwards Your vehicle Parking space detected Message to park Message to press the brake pedal Progress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

The necessary conditions have to be met to park with Park Assist page 242 and the parking mode must be selected page 243.

Parking Look at the display on the instrument panel to see if the space has been detected as ap- propriate and if the correct position for park- ing has been reached Fig. 166 or Fig. 167 . The space is considered

appropriate if the display on the instrument panel shows the message to park 4 . Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engage the reverse gear. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 241. Please note the following message: Auto- matic steering enabled. Pay atten- tion to your surroundings. While you

245

Driving

keep watch around you, carefully start accel- erating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). During the parking manoeuvre, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake. Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to move forward appears on the instrument panel display Fig. 166 or Fig. 167 ; OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish- ed message appears on the instrument panel display. The progress bar 6 indicates the distance to cover page 246. Press the brake pedal until the parking as- sist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: until the symbol goes out on the instrument panel screen. Select first gear. Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it centres it in the space Fig. 166 or Fig. 167 . For best results, wait at the end of each manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has finished turning the steering wheel. The park- ing manoeuvre ends when a corresponding message is displayed on the instrument pan- el and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.

Progress bars The progress bar Fig. 166 6 and Fig. 167 6 on the screen of the instrument panel displays the relative distance to be covered. The greater the distance, the fuller the progress bar. When driving forward, the content of the pro- gress bar decreases upwards, and when re- versing, it decreases downwards.

Note If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely during parking, the result may not be the best.

Leaving a parking space with the parking assist system (only for par- allel parking)

Fig. 168 On the instrument panel display: exit a parallel parking space.

Your vehicle in reverse gear Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space Progress bar to indicate the distance left to cover

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking) The necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist have to be met page 242.

Press the button Fig. 163. A control lamp on the button lights up when the sys- tem is switched on. Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- wards the road you will enter when exiting the parking space. Select reverse gear. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 241. Please note the follow- ing message: Automatic steering ena- bled Pay attention to your surround- ings. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting the park- ing space, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to ac- celerate, engage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake. Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument panel display shows the forward indication.

1

2

3

246

Help with parking and manoeuvring

The progress bar Fig. 168 3 indicates the distance to cover page 246. Press the brake pedal until the parking as- sist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the symbol goes out on the instrument panel screen. Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it can exit the space. The vehicle can exit the space when a cor- responding message is displayed on the in- strument panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the steering with the turning angle set by the Park Assist system. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the park- ing space.

Automatic operation of the brakes by the parking assist system

Park Assist helps the driver by automatically braking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking in time .

Automatic braking intervention to avoid exceeding the speed limit To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving a parking space, the brakes may activate au- tomatically. After automatically activating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a parking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activated once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- ing space. If the speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damages Depending on certain conditions, the Park Assist system can automatically brake the vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly actioning and holding down the brake ped- al . Following this the driver must press the brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reduce damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- ishing.

WARNING The automatic braking intervention by Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The sys- tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ness.

The Park Assist system is subject to cer- tain limitations inherent to the system. In certain situations, the automatic braking intervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all. Always be ready to use the brakes your- self! The automatic braking intervention will end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma- noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

These assist systems help you when parking and manoeuvring:

Park assist plus. It is an assistant that gives a visual and audio warning of obstacles de- tected in front and behind the vehicle page 249.

Rear parking aid. An audio and visual as- sistant that warns of obstacles located be- hind the vehicle page 252.

WARNING Always pay attention, by looking directly, to traffic and the area around the vehicle. Assistance systems are not a replacement

247

Driving

for driver awareness. Responsibility always lies with the driver. The sensors have blind spots in which ob- stacles and people are not detected. Pay special attention to children and animals. Always keep visual control of the sur- roundings: use the mirrors for additional help.

CAUTION Parking distance warning system functions can be affected by different factors that can cause damage: Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects: Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees. Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall. Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- der snow.

Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- sors' signals. The system cannot detect these objects or people wearing such clothes correctly. Sensor signals may be affected by exter- nal sound sources. This may prevent them from detecting people or objects. If the system warns you of the proximity of a low obstacle, please note that after

being detected by the system, the obstacle in question may disappear from the meas- urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos- er, and the system will no longer warn of its presence. In certain circumstances, ob- jects such as high kerbs that could damage the underside of the vehicle are not detec- ted. If the parking distance warning system is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- ble damage. Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can modify the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the parking aid function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop. A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a cured or deformed number plate can cause false detections or a loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note The display on the Infotainment system screen shows a slight time delay. In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area: Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces

with long grass.

External ultrasound sources, such as other vehicles equipped with ultra- sound systems.

Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex- haust gases.

If the number plate is not properly se- cured to the surface of the bumper.

Gradient changes. In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist. We recommend that you practice park- ing in an area without traffic. The volume and tone of the signals and indications can be changed page 253. In vehicles without an infotainment sys- tem, these parameters can be modified in a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised workshop. Please observe information on towing a trailer page 253.

248

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking System Plus

Description

Fig. 169 Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving visual and audio warnings about obstacles detected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible signals and in the Infotainment system Fig. 169.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi- ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve- hicle or behind it by choosing different sounds.

The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:

1.20 mA

1.60 m 0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop!

If the separation is maintained, the warning volume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve- hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me- tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing areas are screened and obstacles at the sides of the vehicle are displayed C .

Special features of ParkPilot with Area View In the following situations the screened area on the side of the vehicle is automatically hid- den:

When a vehicle door is opened. When the ASR is switched off. When there is ASR or ESC regulation. If the vehicle remains stationary for more than approximately 3 minutes.

B

C Parking Aid operation

Fig. 170 Centre console: parking aid button (depending on the version).

Manually connecting and disconnecting the parking aid Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- play (the audible sounds remain active) Press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid Select reverse gear. OR: If you drive forward at a speed of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and an obstacle is en- countered, it is detected when it is approx. less than 95 cm. away. If the automatic con- nection is activated, a reduced view is shown. OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

249

Driving

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid Move the selector lever to position P. OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view Select reverse gear. OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera RVC) Select reverse gear. OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up when the sys- tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto- matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the segments will appear on screen.

It only operates every time the speed is re- duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first time.

If it is switched off using the button, one of the following actions must be taken for it to reactivate automatically:

Switch off the ignition and switch it on again. OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) approx. OR: move the lever into position P and pack again. OR: switch the automatic activation on and off in the Infotainment system.

Automatic activation of the park assist can be switched on and off in the infotainment sys- tem page 88:

Switch the ignition on. Select: Infotainment button > Settings > Parking and manoeuvring. Select Automatic activation. If the box is checked , the function is connected. OR, in the Park distance control function, select Settings > Automatic activa- tion.

If activated automatically, an audible sound warning will only be given when obstacles in front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap- prox.

CAUTION The automatic connection of the Parking Aid only works when you are driving slowly. If driving style is not adapted to the circum- stances, an accident and serious injury or damage may be caused.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 171 Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

White segments: the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the direction opposite to travel. Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the vehicles path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away.

250

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Red segments: obstacles are less than approx. 30 cm away.

The Media System Plus or Navi System will display the expected path, depending on how the steering wheel is turned.

If an obstacle is located in the vehicles way, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

When the penultimate segment is displayed, the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are repre- sented in red, including those out of the path. Stop the vehicle! in Introduction on page 247, in Introduction on page 248 !

Setting the indications and audio signals

The indications and audio signal settings are in the infotainment system page 88.

Automatic activation on off.

Front volume Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness Sound tone in the front area.

Rear volume Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness Sound tone in the rear area.

Adjust volume When the parking aid is switched on, the vol- ume of the audio source will be reduced, de- pending on the selected option.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a fault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area A are displayed Fig. 169. If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area B are displayed. Symbol is displayed.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Trailer mode

Fig. 172 Parking assist display on the screen with trailer attached.

On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch, when the trailer is connected, the rear sen- sors will not activate when reverse gear is en- gaged or button is pressed. Therefore, any objects behind or to the side of the vehicle will not be indicated on the screen and no audio signals will sound.

The screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Manoeuvre braking function 3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency braking function is used to minimise damage in the event of a collision.

251

Driving

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring function activates emergency braking when it detects an obstacle in the vehicles path that could cause a collision, driving forwards or in reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is activated automatically. For the system to operate, manoeuvring speed must be be- tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6 mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and 10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking while manoeuvring function will be inactive in the same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once the gear is changed, or the selector levers position is changed, the function will be ac- tive again. The Parking Aids limitations apply.

The manoeuvre braking function is set in the infotainment system using the button > Settings > Parking and manoeuvring.

on permits the use of the braking while manoeuvring function. off does not permit the use of the braking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency braking When the function is deactivated with the Braking while manoeuvring button that

appears on the Parking aid screen of the In- fotainment system. Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or bonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible and visual assistant that warns of obstacles located be- hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rear bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible and visible warnings on the Infotainment system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the like, as this could affect the system's op- eration. Cleaning instructions page 302.

The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is:

0.60 m 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop! in Introduction on page 247, in Introduction on page 248!

Side area: Central area:

If the separation is maintained, the warning volume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection Place the selector level in position P, N or D (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain the system active for approximately 8 sec- onds before switching off. During that time, Parking assist will switch off if:

The selector lever is moved to position P. OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- play (the audible sounds remain active) Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system. OR press the BACK function button.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button.

252

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Change from reduced view to full view Select reverse gear. OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist (Rear View Camera RVC) click on the car icon of the reduced display.

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera RVC) Select reverse gear. OR: press the RVC function button.

Setting the indications and audio signals The indications and audio signal settings are in the infotainment system page 88.

Rear volume: volume in the rear area. Rear sound settings/treble: sound tone in the rear area. Lower volume: when the parking aid is switched on, the volume of the audio source will be reduced, depending on the selected option.

Error messages If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a fault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the parking aid is connected.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the infotainment system display.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing device In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is connected, the parking aid will not be activa- ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 173 Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima- ted with the help of the segments at the rear of the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

White segments: the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the direction opposite to travel. They are also displayed when the elec- tronic parking brake is activated. Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the vehicles path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away. Red segments: obstacles are less than approx. 30 cm away.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta- cles are represented in red (including those out of the path). Do not continue to reverse in Introduction on page 247, in Introduction on page 248!

253

Driving

Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING The reverse assist does not make it possi- ble to precisely calculate the distance from obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- tem's own limits, hence its negligent use may cause serious accidents and injuries if used without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her surroundings at all times to ensure safe driving. The camera lens expands and distorts the field of view and displays the objects on the screen in a way that is different from reality. Distance perception is also distor- ted. Due to the screen resolution or light con- ditions, some items may be blurry or not displayed at all. Take care with thin posts, fences, railings or trees that might not be seen on the screen and could damage the vehicle. The reverse assist has blind spots where it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. The system is not a replacement for driv- er awareness. Supervise the parking ma- noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area at all times.

Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. The images are only two-dimensional. Protruding objects or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all. Vehicle load modifies the representation of the guide lines Fig. 174. The width rep- resented by the lines decreases with vehi- cle load. Pay special attention to the sur- roundings when the inside of the vehicle of the luggage compartment are loaded. In the following situations, objects or oth- er vehicles appear to be further away or closer than they actually are. Pay special attention: If moving from a flat surface to a slope

and vice-versa. If the vehicle is heavily loaded. When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface or that protrude from it. These objects may be outside the camera angle when reversing.

Note It is important to take great care and pay special attention if the driver is not familiar with the system. Reverse assist will not be available if the rear lid is open.

Usage instructions

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- sists the driver with reverse parking or ma- noeuvring page 212.

The camera image is viewed together with orientation lines projected on the Infotain- ment system screen. Part of the bumper can be seen at the bottom, which can be used by the driver as a reference point.

Rear assist settings Rear assist offers the user the possibility to change the image's brightness, contrast and colour settings.

To change these settings:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place without switching off the ignition or the infotainment system. Apply the parking brake. Select reverse gear. Press the function button displayed on the screen. Make the desired adjustments on the menu by pressing the /+ function buttons or by moving the scroll button.

254

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Requirements for parking and manoeu- vring with the rear assist The system should not be used in the follow- ing cases:

If the image displayed is not very reliable or is distorted, or if the lens is dirty. If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete. If the vehicle is heavily loaded. If the position of the camera has changed after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- ommends practising in a place without too much traffic or in a car park when there are good weather and visibility conditions.

Parking and manoeuvring with re- verse assist

Fig. 174 Display on the Infotainment system screen.: guide lines.

Meaning of the orientation lines Fig. 174 Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle (approximately in its total width) on the road. End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behind the vehicle on the road. Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind the vehicle on the road. Horizontal red line: a safe distance of approx. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the road.

1

2

3

4

Switching the system on and off Reverse assist is connected by a contact when engaging reverse gear. The system switches off 8 seconds after disengaging reverse gear and immediately after removing the contact. The camera will stop transmitting images above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- verse engaged.

In combination with the parking aid plus sys- tem page 249, the camera image will no longer be displayed when reverse gear is dis- engaged, and the system will display the op- tical information provided by the parking aid system.

It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im- age:

By pressing one of the Infotainment system buttons on the display. OR: by clicking on the miniature vehicle shown on the screen.

If you wish to display the rear assist image again:

Disengage and re-engage reverse gear. OR: Press the RVC function button1)

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when re- verse gear is engaged.

255

Driving

Parking manoeuvre Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se- lect reverse gear. Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel so that the side lines lead towards the park- ing space. Guide the vehicle into the parking space so that the side lines run parallel to it.

Towing bracket device

Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula- tions about driving with a trailer and the use of a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily for carrying people, although it can also be used to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding technical equipment. This additional load has an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption and vehicle performance and in some cases can reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force from the vehicle, and thus more concentration from the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit- ted on the coupling device The maximum technically permitted vertical load of the tow bar on the hitch of the towing device is 55 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the

Start-Stop system operates as normal. No special characteristics need to be taken into account.

If the system does not recognise the trailer or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- nected by pressing the corresponding button in the lower part of the centre console before driving with the trailer, and it should remain off for the rest of the journey .

Vehicles with driving profile selection If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- ded. You are advised to select another of the available driving profiles before beginning to drive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar load Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en- gine performance and the ability to climb slopes, the tow load decreases proportional- ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com- bination must be reduced by 10% for every 1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum authorised

256

Towing bracket device

drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim- it.

WARNING Never use the trailer to transport people, since it would put their life in danger and is also prohibited.

WARNING Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents. Only use the towing bracket if it is in a perfect state of repair and is properly se- cured. Never modify or repair the towing bracket in any way. In order to reduce the danger of injury in the event of rear-end collisions and to avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists when parking the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hook when you are not using a trail- er. According to EU regulation 2021_535 it is not permitted to install a towing device that completely or partially covers the rear number plate. Never fit a towing bracket with weight distribution or load compensation. The vehicle has not been designed for this type of towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail and the trailer could be released from the vehicle.

WARNING Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects can affect driving properties and even cause an accident. Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Trailers with a high centre of gravity are more likely to overturn than those with a low one. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir- cumstances). This also applies in countries where driving at higher speeds is permit- ted. Take into account the speed limit for vehicles with trailers in the corresponding country, as it could be less than the speed limit for vehicles without a trailer. Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNING If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop

system must be disconnected manually whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise the brake system could be damaged and could consequently cause a serious acci- dent or injury. Always disconnect the Start-Stop system manually when using a towing bracket that has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm page 96. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's first 1000 km page 206. If a removable and retractable tow hook is fitted, it should not be mounted when not in use. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehicle could be greater if the tow hook is fitted. Some retrofitted towing brackets cover the rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing eye should not be used for tow- starting or for towing other vehicles. For this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit- ted with a towing bracket, always keep the tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

257

Driving

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-fitted with a towing bracket meet all the technical and legal re- quirements for driving with a trailer page 263.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for the maximum authorised load of the trailer that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer and must be properly secured to the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for this vehicle. Always check and take into ac- count the towing bracket manufacturer's in- structions. Never fit a towing bracket with weight distribution or load compensation.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumper Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to the area where the bumper is mounted. The towing bracket should not impair the bum- per's function. Do not make modifications or repairs to the exhaust system or the brake system. Make regular checks to ensure that the towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling system Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling sys- tem should have sufficient coolant and be

prepared for the additional effort involved in driving with a trailer.

Trailer brakes If the trailer has its own brake system, please take the relevant legal requirements into ac- count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cable Always use a cable between the vehicle and the trailer page 259.

Trailer tail lights The trailer's rear lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations page 259.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not sure that the trailer's electrical connection is correct, have it checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Exterior mirrors If you cannot see the area behind the trailer with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle, additional mirrors will have to be installed in accordance with the regulations of the coun- try in question. The exterior mirrors should be adjusted before you start driving and must provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption Never exceed the values indicated!

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts

Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

WARNING If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is not the right one, the trailer could become detached from the vehicle and cause seri- ous injury.

CAUTION If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sour- ces. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer.

258

Towing bracket device

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 175 Schematic representation: assign- ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock- et.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailer The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the connection between the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine running, electrical devices on the trailer receive power from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has been connected, the consumers on the trailer will receive electricity through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for example, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan only receive electrical power if the engine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system, you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available.

Tow cable The tow rope must always be securely fixed to the towing vehicle and loose enough so

that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. However, make sure that the cable does not rub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lights Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure they are working correctly and that they comply with the relevant safety regulations. Make sure that the maximum permissible power that can be absorbed by the trailer is not exceeded page 258.

Include in the anti-theft alarm The trailer is included in the anti-theft system if the following conditions are met:

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an anti-theft alarm and towing bracket. If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power sock- et. If the electrical systems of the vehicle and trailer are in perfect condition and have no faults or damage. If the vehicle is locked with the key and the anti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- gered if the electrical connection with the trailer is cut off.

259

Driving

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lights For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does not go off when the electrical connection with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected when hitching the trailer, this will automatically switch to the Normal profile. If the system cannot detect the attached trailer or if the towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au- to repair shop other than SEAT, you must manually select the Normal profile before you start driving with a trailer attached. To re- connect the Eco profile once the trailer has been unhitched, switch the ignition off and back on once.

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, it may lead to an excessive amount of current supplied to the trailer, which can cause abnormalities in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- dents and serious injuries.

Ensure that any repairs that need to be carried out on the electrical system are carried out by a specialised workshop. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sour- ces.

WARNING Contact between the pins of the trailer power socket can cause short circuits, overloading of the electrical system or fail- ure of the lighting system, and consequent- ly can cause accidents and serious injuries. Never connect the pins of the trailer pow- er socket to each other. Make sure any work on bent pins is car- ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehicle when parked; place it on its support wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or falls due, for example, to a variation of the load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will be placed on the towing bracket and the trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

Note In case of anomalies in the electrical sys- tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in

the anti-theft alarm system, have them in- spected by a specialised workshop. If the trailer accessories consume energy through the power socket to the trailer and the engine is turned off, the battery will dis- charge. If the vehicle battery is running low, the electrical connection with the trailer will be automatically cut.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling device The technically permissible maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow . The vertical load on the coupling is ex- erted vertically from above on the hook of the towing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling de- vice contained in the type plate of the towing bracket are experimental values only. The correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle documentation. The information in the vehicle documentation takes precedence at all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom- mends making the most of the maximum

260

Towing bracket device

vertical load technically permissible on the coupling device page 256. An insufficient vertical load has a negative influence on the behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual weight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified into distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob- taining information from a specialised work- shop regarding which type of trailer is most suitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loading The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the load must be as close as possible to the max- imum vertical load technically permissible on the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis- tributed between the back and front of the trailer:

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible or above it. Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressure Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the towing vehicle with the maximum allowable pressure page 291.

WARNING If the maximum permissible axle weight, the maximum load technically permissible on the coupling point, the maximum author- ised vehicle weight or the gross combina- tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer are exceeded, accidents and serious inju- ries may occur. Never exceed the values indicated! The actual weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum per- missible axle weight. The weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum permissible weight.

WARNING A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil- ity and security of the towing vehicle and trailer, which could lead to accidents and serious injuries. Always load the trailer correctly. Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights The front part of the vehicle may be raised when the trailer is connected and the light may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the headlight range adjuster page 1171).

Specific features of driving with a trailer If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- vent the jerking that can be caused by the locking of trailer wheels. Due to the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis- tance increases.

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights.

261

Driving

When going down a slope, go into a lower gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip- tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad- vantage of the braking power provided by the engine. Otherwise, the braking system could overheat and even fail. The trailer weight, as well as the gross com- bination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, change the centre of gravity and the properties of the vehicle. If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer is loaded, then the load distribution is incor- rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailer Depending on the slope of the hill and the combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back- wards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

Press and hold the brake pedal. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way down. Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se- lector lever to position D/S page 196. Apply the handbrake. Release the brake pedal.

Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch pedal. Do not release the hand brake until the en- gine has sufficient power to start driving

WARNING If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury. Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects will change the ve- hicle handling and braking distances. Always drive cautiously and carefully. Brake earlier than usual. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Slow down, especially when driving down hills or slopes. Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu- vres. Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating. Take into account the speed limit for vehi- cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than for vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combination is an additional function of the electronic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is weav- ing, it intervenes to reduce the swaying of the trailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa- tion requirements The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a compatible towing bracket. The ESC and ASR are active. The control lamp or is not lit up on the instrument cluster. The trailer is connected to the towing vehi- cle through the trailer power socket. The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h (approx. 37 mph). The maximum vertical load technically per- missible is not being exceeded on the cou- pling device. The trailer has a rigid draw bar. If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped with a mechanical overrun brake.

262

Towing bracket device

WARNING The enhanced safety provided by the elec- tric stability control of the vehicle and trail- er should not lead you to take any risks that could compromise your safety. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery. When adjusting any settings, stop accel- erating.

WARNING The electric stability control for the vehicle and trailer may not correctly detect all driving conditions. When the ESC is switched off, the stabili- sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al- so switched off. The stability system does not always de- tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise these correctly. When driving on surfaces with poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with the sta- bility system. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over without having previously weaved. If a trailer is not attached, but a connec- tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g. installation of a bicycle rack with lights),

repeated automatic braking may occur in extreme driving conditions.

Towing bracket device

Description

Fig. 176 The towing device supports trailers / tow hook / key

Depending on the country or version, the re- movable hook of the towing device is under

the cover of the load area of the luggage compartment.

The tow hook is fitted and removed by hand and is supplied with a key.

13-pin connector Safety lug Hook housing Hook housing cap Protective cap of the ball head Removable tow hook Locking lever Lock cover Release bolt Lock Locking balls Key

Operation and conservation Put the cover on the housing cavity so that dirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check the ball head and apply suitable grease if neces- sary.

Use the protective cap to store the tow hook.

Clean the housing cavity surfaces and treat them with an appropriate conservation prod- uct.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

263

Driving

WARNING Before each journey with the tow hook fit- ted, make sure that it is correctly adjusted and attached in its housing. If the tow hook is not properly fitted and attached, do not use it. Do not use the towing bracket device for towing if it is damaged or has missing parts. Do not modify or adapt the towing device connection. Never unhook the tow hook while the trailer is hitched.

CAUTION Handle the tow hook with care in order to avoid damaging the bumper paintwork. The top part of the hook housing is greased Fig. 176 3 . When using the de- vice, make sure that it has not been re- moved.

Note Contact a specialised workshop if you lose your key. Towing the vehicle with the tow hook page 51.

Placing in the standby position

Fig. 177 Tow hook reserve position

Fig. 178 Reserve position: position verification

Before assembling it, place the tow hook in the standby position with the following two steps.

Insert and turn the key in the direction of the arrow Fig. 177 1 until the hole in the key faces upwards (arrow). Grab the tow hook under the protective cover. Press the release bolt Fig. 177 B in the direction of arrow 2 , while pressing lever C in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go. The lever will remain blocked in this posi- tion.

Verification of the reserve position Key Fig. 178 A is in the released position (the key hole is facing upwards). The release bolt Fig. 178 B can be moved.

264

Towing bracket device

Lever Fig. 178 C is in the lower position.

When adjusted in this way, the tow hook is ready to be installed.

CAUTION The key cannot be removed or turned in the standby position.

Fitting the tow hook

Fig. 179 Putting the tow hook in place. Step 1.

Fig. 180 Putting the tow hook in place. Step 2.

Step 1. Remove the hook housing cap Fig. 176 4 downwards. Put the tow hook in its standby position page 264. Hold the tow hook from below and fit it into the hook hosing in the direction of the arrow Fig. 179 1 until it is heard to fit into place .

Lever Fig. 179 A automatically turns in the direction of arrow 2 upwards, and the re- lease bolt B moves outwards (its red and green parts are visible) .

If lever A does not turn or the release bolt B does not come out, the tow hook should be removed by turning the lever as far as possi- ble downwards from the housing cavity, and the tow hooks support surfaces and the cavi- ty should then be cleaned.

Step 2. Turn the key to the right just half a turn, until the hole in the key faces downwards Fig. 180 1 . Remove the key 2 . Place the cover B on the lock 3 Fig. 180 . Check that the tow hook is correctly fixed in place page 266, Safety check.

WARNING Keep your hands away from the lever when fitting the tow hook to avoid trapping your fingers Fig. 179 A . Do not try to force the lever up to turn the key. The detachable ball would not be se- cured properly!

265

Driving

CAUTION After removing the key, place the cover over the lever's lock. If the lock becomes soiled it will be impossible to insert the key. Keep the device's housing cavity clean. Dirtiness can prevent the tow hook from being safety secured! If the device is removed, always place the cap in the hook's housing.

Safety check

Fig. 181 Tow hook fixed correctly

Make sure that the tow hook is correctly at- tached before each use.

Tow hook fixed correctly: The tow hook will not fall out of the housing cavity after a strong impact. Lever A is facing upwards Fig. 181.

The red and green part of the unlocking bolt B is completely visible Fig. 181. The key has been removed. Cover C is over the lock Fig. 181.

WARNING Keep your hands away from the lever when releasing the tow hook to avoid trap- ping your fingers Fig. 181 A . The towing device should only be used if the tow hook has been properly locked in place!

Removing the tow hook

Fig. 182 Removing the tow hook

266

Towing bracket device

Fig. 183 Removing the tow hook

Remove cover A from lock 1 Fig. 182. Insert key B in the lock 2 Fig. 182. Turn the key to the left 3 just half turn, until the hole in the key is facing upwards Fig. 182. Hold the tow hook from below. Press the release bolt A in the direction of arrow 1 , and at the same time press lever B as far as it will go in the direction of arrow 2 Fig. 183.

Now the tow hook has been released and falls freely. If this does not occur, press with the other hand from above.

The tow hook is now in the standby position and is therefore ready to be reinserted into the hook housing .

Fit cover 4 Fig. 176 onto its housing.

WARNING Never remove the tow hook while the trailer is hitched. Never leave the tow hook loose in the lug- gage compartment. It could cause damage in the even of sharp braking, and even jeop- ardise passenger safety!

CAUTION If the lever is not pressed down as far as it will go, after removing the tow hook it will continue upwards and will not lock into its standby position. The tow hook must re- main in this position before being fitted again. Store the device in the reserve position with the key inserted and with the same side facing upwards. Risk of damaging the key! When operating the lever, do not apply too much pressure (for example, do not stand on it)!

Note Before extracting the tow hook, we rec- ommend fitting the protective cover over the ball head. Remove dirt from the tow hook before storing it with the vehicle tools.

Connecting the trailer

Fig. 184 Turning the 13-pin connector

Grip the connector in area A and remove it in the direction of the arrow Fig. 184. Remove the protective cap from the ball head Fig. 176 5 . Attach the trailer to the ball head. Open the cover of connector A and con- nect the trailer Fig. 184. Hook the trailer's pair cable to the safety lug Fig. 184 B . When hooked up, the pair cable should have some slack in all vehicle towing positions (sharp curves, reverse, etc.).

Follow these steps in reverse to unhitch the trailer.

WARNING Never use the safety lug to tow!

267

Driving

After hooking up the trailer and connect- ing the socket, check that all the trailer's rear lights are working properly.

Note If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting, check the fuses on the instrument panel page 55. The contact between the retainer cable and the safety lug may give cause wear in the lug. This wear does not stop it from op- erating properly and is not a fault. It is ex- cluded from the warranty. When hitching and unhitching the trailer, the vehicle's handbrake should be applied.

Installing a bicycle carrier on the tow bar

The maximum permitted weight of the bicy- cle carrier system, including the load, is 50 kg. The bicycle carrier system may not pro- trude more than 700 mm behind the ball head. Only bicycle carrier systems for a max- imum of 2 bicycles are allowed to be instal- led. Heavier bicycles must be carried as close to the vehicle (tow hook) as possible.

WARNING The incorrect use of the towing device with a bicycle carrier mounted on the tow hook can cause accidents and injury. Never exceed the maximum weight or the limits indicated above. The bicycle rack may not be mounted to the neck of the hook below the ball be- cause, due to the shape of the neck and depending on the rack model, the rack could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi- cle. Always read and take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account.

CAUTION If the maximum weight and limits indicated above are exceeded, the vehicle may suf- fer considerable damage. Never exceed the values indicated!

Note SEAT recommends removing, as far as pos- sible, all removable parts of the bicycles before setting off. These parts include, for example, baskets and saddlebags, child seats or batteries. This improves aerody- namics and the centre of gravity of the rack system.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 185 Limits and attachment points for ret- rofitting a towing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets be retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For

268

Towing bracket device

example, it may very well be necessary to adjust the cooling system or mount thermal protection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance specifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ball head and the road Fig. 185 C must never be less than that indicated. This also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the technically permissible maximum vertical load on the coupling device.

Distance specifications Fig. 185: Attachment points (lower part of the vehi- cle) 65 mm (minimum) 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) 1,025 mm 322 mm 448 mm 854 mm

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other unsuitable power sour-

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

ces. Only use suitable connectors to con- nect the trailer. The towing bracket should be retrofitted only at a specialised workshop.

WARNING If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un- suitable, the trailer may separate from the vehicle while driving. This could cause seri- ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note According to regulation EU2021_535 it is not permitted to install a towing device that cannot be removed or retracted. Only use towing brackets that have been approved by SEAT for the model in ques- tion. In some versions, the fitting of a conven- tional towing hook solution is not recom- mended. Please consult your Technical Service.

269

Practical tips

Practical tips

Checking and refilling lev- els

Refuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 186 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the vehicle.

The tank flap is unlocked when the car is un- locked using the central locking remote con- trol page 96.

Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the retainer zone. Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap Fig. 186. Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as the pumps automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion chamber in the fuel tank. Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go. Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at page 272.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv- en in page 316.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy- brids Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet- rol until the control lamp switches off, and then the tank must be refilled. This is neces- sary to ensure that the system works proper- ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv- ing with petrol.

WARNING Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se- rious burns and other injuries. When refuelling, turn off the engine and turn off the ignition for safety reasons.

Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the vicinity due to the risk of explosion. Observe legislation governing the use, storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis- ter in the vehicle. For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi- cle. In an accident the canister could be damaged and could leak. If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points: Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi- ble into the spare fuel canister.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in con- tact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is explosive. Risk of fatal accident!

270

Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it should be removed immediately. It could otherwise damage the paintwork. Never run the tank completely dry. The catalytic converter can be damaged.

For the sake of the environment Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Note There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- essary, request assistance from special- ised personnel.

Note If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if it is very small, it is possible that it will not be able to open the protective device. Be- fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it, try a different pump or request specialist help. If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can- ister, the protective device will not open. One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in slowly.

Refuelling natural gas

Fig. 187 Tank cap open: gas filler mouth 1 , filler mouth retainer 2 .

Before refuelling, the engine and the ignition, mobile telephone and heating must be switched off separately .

Read the instructions on how to use the natu- ral gas pump carefully.

Refuelling The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth Fig. 187.

Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth 1 . Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas filler mouth. The fuel tank will be full when the pump compressor automatically cuts the supply.

If you wish to finish refuelling in advance, press the button on the pump to stop the flow.

If the ambient temperature is very high, the natural gas pumps overheating protection disconnects it automatically.

Closing the fuel tank cap Check that the mouth retainer 2 of the gas filler is not trapped with the filler. If this hap- pens, replace it in the filler mouth. Insert the plug in the filler mouth. Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it click into place.

WARNING Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily flammable substance. Incorrect handling of the natural gas can cause accidents se- rious burns and other injuries. Before refuelling with natural gas, en- gage the filling mouth correctly. If you can smell gas, stop refuelling immediately. Read and take note in Natural gas on page 274.

WARNING The vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat- ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG), so LNG or LPG should not be used under any circumstances. Liquid gas can cause

271

Practical tips

an explosion of the natural gas tanks and cause severe injuries! .

WARNING If the vehicle underbody touches the ground or in the event of a rear collision, there could be damage to the natural gas tanks. If damaged, natural gas tanks are full of fuel and can explode, causing seri- ous or fatal injuries. Even if you don't notice the smell of gas, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop immediately and have the natural gas sys- tem checked. Do not refuel natural gas again until the natural gas system has been inspected.

Note The filling nozzles of natural gas pumps can differ in the way they are operated. Ask a qualified employee at the petrol station to do the refuelling if you do not know how. Noises heard when refuelling are normal and do not indicate damage in the system. The vehicle natural gas system is pre- pared both for refuelling with a small com- pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-

sor (fast refuel) at natural gas service sta- tions.

Fuel types

Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 188 Identification of fuels according to European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols on the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. The identification serves to prevent confusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (E stands for Etha- nol). The number indicates the percent- age of ethanol in the petrol. E5 means, for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. Diesel according to the EN590 standard. The number indicates the maximum per- centage of Biodiesel in the fuel. B7 means a maximum of 7% Biodiesel. Synthetic diesel according to the EN15940 standard. Natural gas: CNG means Compressed Natural Gas.

Type of petrol 3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- verter and must only be run on unleaded petrol. The petrol must comply with the standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled (E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiated by using the octane numbers (RON) or via the anti-knock index (AKI).

1

2

3

4

1) Depending on country 2) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

272

Checking and refilling levels

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or normal 91 octane petrol at least We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power loss) may be used.

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or super 95 octane petrol at least We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ble.

CAUTION Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. E30 - E100 button must not be used. The fuel system would be damaged. Exception: vehicles with Totalflex engine page 273, Ethanol fuel. A single refuelling with leaded fuel or other metal additives entails a permanent deterioration of the effectiveness of the catalytic converter. Only use fuel additives that have been approved by SEAT. The products that con- tain substances to increase the octane rat- ing or decrease knocking may contain met- al additives that damage the engine and catalytic converter. This type of products must not be used. Do not use fuels shown in the pump as containing metals. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Risk of engine damage! High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

Note Fuel with an octane rating higher than the one required by the engine can be used.

In countries in which there is no sulphur- free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- phur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel 3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with the marking Petrol/ethanol.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that page 272, Type of pet- rol

Note SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu- sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- crease impurities that using E100 ethanol fuel might have left in the engine.

1) This motor is only available in some markets. 273

Practical tips

Natural gas 3 Valid for: vehicles with natural gas engines

Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid form, addition to others.

Use of compressed natural gas (CNG) Vehicles with a natural gas engine must only be working with CNG (Compressed Natural Gas CNG ), or with a mixture of biomethane if it complies with Regulation EN 16723-2.

Fuels such as liquefied natural gas (LNG), liq- uefied petroleum gas (LPG) or hithane (mix- ture of hydrogen and methane) should not be used to fill the tank.

Natural gas quality and consumption Natural gas is divided into the groups H and L depending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power and inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content than type L. The higher the heating power of the natural gas, the lower the consumption will be.

The engine management automatically adapts to the natural gas used according to its quality. Therefore, different quality gases can be mixed in the tank, without the need for comprehensive draining before applying a different quality gas.

Updated information relating to natural gas quality is displayed on the instrument panel page 72.

Regular checks of the natural gas system The natural gas tanks may be damaged or corroded by external factors. The walls of the gas tanks are weakened by deformations, damage or corrosion. The vehicle owner must have a specialised workshop check (visual check) the gas system at least once every 4 years. Natural gas tanks must be replaced at a specialised workshop.

WARNING Failure to act when you can smell gas in the vehicle or when refuelling can cause seri- ous injuries. Stop the vehicle immediately. Switch the ignition off. Open the doors to appropriately venti- late the vehicle. Extinguish cigarettes immediately. Move away from the vehicle or switch off objects that may cause sparks or a fire. If you continue to smell gas, do not con- tinue driving! Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault repaired. If necessary, warn the emergency serv- ices.

WARNING Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re- sult in serious injury or even death. Have the natural gas deposits checked at least every 4 years (visual check). Natural gas tanks have a limited service life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced when required. You can obtain further infor- mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci- alised workshops.

Engine management and emissions control system

Introduction

WARNING Due to the high temperatures reached by the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you should not park your vehicle near a surface that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard! Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle around the area of the exhaust system: Fire hazard!

274

Checking and refilling levels

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked page 275.

It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop.

When the ignition is switched on, the (Electronic Power Control) lights up and should go off once the engine has started.

Note While the indicator lamps , or are on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel consumption may go up and the engine might lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter Always use unleaded petrol. Never run the fuel tank dry. When changing or adding engine oil, do not exceed the necessary amount page 281, Topping up the engine oil. Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary page 49.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the car is moving, have the vehicle inspected by a specialised work- shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp will light up when any of these symptoms occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the cata- lytic converter.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the gases on occasions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. This can quite often be avoided by changing to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor- mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short journeys are made continuously), it becomes blocked with soot and the following indica- tion is displayed to the driver: Particu- late filter: cleaned while the vehi- cle is moving. See Manual. The partic- ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).

Regeneration of the particulate filter Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine is at operating temperature.

Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h (31-75 mph). This increases the temperature and burns the soot in the filter . Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears. End the regeneration journey once the con- trol warning lamp has gone out.

275

Practical tips

If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes of running in regeneration mode, have a spe- cialised workshop repair the fault

WARNING Always adjust your speed to suit the weath- er conditions, roads, braking distance and traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen- eration phase. Route recommendations should never make you disregard each country's specific traffic regulations.

CAUTION When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, the self-cleaning function of this system recommends optimal driving for this func- tion. Due to the high temperatures caused by the regeneration of the particulate filter, it is possible that the radiator fan will acti- vate after stopping the engine, even it its operating temperature has not been reached. Noise, smells and high idle speeds can occur during regeneration. Always use the correct engine oil and the correct fuel to make sure the useful life of the particulate filter is not affected. Also avoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compart- ment

Always be aware of the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire when working in the engine compartment (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).

Always observe the warnings listed below and follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po- tentially hazardous area .

WARNING When work is done in the engine compart- ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even fires can occur. Switch the engine off, remove the key from the ignition and apply the electronic parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox, place the selector lever in position P. Wait for the engine to cool down. Never open the bonnet if you see steam or drips of coolant being released from the engine compartment. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before opening the bonnet. Keep children away from the engine compartment.

Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- tion on the engine compartment, as these may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool- ant). Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec- trical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 49. The battery could explode. If working inside the engine compart- ment, remember that, even when the igni- tion is switched off, the radiator fan may start up automatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury. Never cover the engine with additional in- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of fire! Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure. Protect face, hands and arms by cover- ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect against escaping coolant and steam. Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the engine compartment. If you have to work underneath the vehi- cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running,

276

Checking and refilling levels

there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following: Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system. Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro- tating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewel- lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.

Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary precau- tions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

Observe the following additional warn- ings if work on the fuel system or the elec- trical system is necessary: Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network. Do not smoke. Never work near naked flames. Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment Inspect the ground underneath your vehi- cle regularly so that any leaks are detec- ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil

or other fluids in the area where it was parked, have your vehicle inspected at the workshop. Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en- vironment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 189 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.

Fig. 190 Lever under the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.

Open the door and pull the lever under the dashboard Fig. 189 1 . To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on the lever located under the bonnet, in the centre Fig. 190 2 . The arrester hooks are released. The bonnet can be opened. Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet Slightly lift the bonnet.

277

Practical tips

Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. At a height of approximately 20 cm let it fall so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.

WARNING Make sure that the bonnet is properly closed. If it opens when driving, it can cause an accident.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open it when

the windscreen wipers are in place against the windscreen.

Checking levels

Fig. 191 Diagram for the location of the various el- ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank page 282 Engine oil level dipstick page 280 Engine oil filler cap page 281 Brake fluid reservoir page 284

1

2

3

4

Battery page 285 Windscreen washer reservoir page 285

5

6

278

Checking and refilling levels

Note The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine.

Engine oil

General notes

Fig. 192 In the engine compartment: engine oil label

Fig. 193 In the engine compartment: area where the engine oil label is located

Key to the Fig. 192: Information about the engine oil stand- ard. Information about engine oil viscosity.

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- tial for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards.

For vehicles with an engine oil label If the engine oil has to be topped up, use one of the oils shown on the label Fig. 192. The label with the prescribed standard is located at the front of the engine compartment Fig. 193 1 . If you use the recommended engine oil, you can top up the oil as often as necessary.

For vehicles without an engine oil label Contact a specialised workshop or SEAT offi- cial service for information about the corre- sponding standard.

If the engine oil level is too low If the recommended engine oil is not availa- ble, in the event of an emergency you can change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L of the next oil until the next oil change:

A

B

Petrol and CNG engines: VW 504 00, ACEA C3 or API SN standard.

SEAT recommends changing the oil at a spe- cialised workshop. SEAT recommends an Of- ficial SEAT Service.

SEAT recommends the use of engine oils ap- proved according to the appropriate VW standard. Use of engine oils that do not meet these quality requirements can cause engine damage.

SEAT recommends the use of Original SEAT Spare Part engine oils.

Engine oil additives No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

CAUTION Take the following into account if you have refilled with an engine oil different to those specified in the aforementioned standards, or by your SEAT technical service centre: There is no way of completely avoiding the danger of causing damage to the en- gine and particulate filter. You can continue driving with the vehicle if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and request an oil change. Oth- erwise, there is a danger of engine dam- age.

279

Practical tips

If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of engine oil, drive with the engine at low load levels and within the medium RPM range as a maximum. Do not drive at more than 80 km/h and do not travel more than 300 km (approximately). Go to a specialised work- shop as soon as possible and request an oil change. Otherwise, there is a danger of en- gine damage. You are responsible for the risk of possi- ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust system). If in doubt, do not start the engine and request assistance from the technical service centre. Do not start the engine if you have top- ped up with a fluid other than engine oil. Request assistance from the technical service centre. Danger of engine damage!

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corre- sponding VW specifications and recom- mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving! Engine oil pressure too low. Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom- panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en- gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil page 281.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to do so page 281.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor. Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un- til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 87.

Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 194 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.

Checking oil level Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then stop.

Wait for about two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out once more and check the oil level Fig. 194. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones A and C . It can never go above zone A .

280

Checking and refilling levels

Zone A : do not add oil. Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level in that zone. Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNING Any work carried out in the engine com- partment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. When working in the engine compart- ment, always observe the safety warnings page 276.

CAUTION If the oil level is above area A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Con- tact a Technical Service.

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 195 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in Working in the engine compartment on page 276.

Topping up engine oil Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening Fig. 195. Carefully add oil in small quantities (no more than 0.5 l). To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes and recheck the oil level page 280. If necessary, add some more oil. When the oil level reaches at least zone Fig. 194 B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully .

The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine compartment il- lustration page 278.

Engine oil specification page 279.

WARNING Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents when topping up.

CAUTION If the oil level is above area Fig. 194 A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic con- verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above zone Fig. 194 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and leak into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- tem.

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corre- sponding VW specifications and recom- mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

281

Practical tips

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required! Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings page 276. Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries. Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm. Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil. Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children.

CAUTION No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine damage. Any damage caused by the use of such addi- tives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

For the sake of the environment We recommend that you change the en- gine oil and the filter at a technical service centre. Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all the engine oil.

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of water and at least 40 % of the additive G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25C (-13F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con- siderably raises the boiling point of the cool- ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent- age of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- tifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the additive G12evo for optimal protection against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13 (TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green blue) engine coolants decreases pro- tection again corrosion and should be avoi- ded.

WARNING If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may fail lead- ing to serious damage. Ensure that the percentage of additive is correct for the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehi- cle is to be used. When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- cle would be immobilised.

CAUTION The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not ap- proved by SEAT. If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indi- cates that the G12evo additive has been

282

Checking and refilling levels

mixed with an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possi- ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly dis- posed of, with respect to the environment.

Refilling coolant

Fig. 196 In the engine compartment: marking on coolant expansion tank.

Fig. 197 Engine compartment: coolant expan- sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the engine compartment page 278.

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Switch the ignition off.

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the marks Fig. 196. When the engine is hot, it may be slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant Wait for the engine to cool down.

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left .

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you could damage the engine. If there is no coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- tinue driving. You should obtain professional assistance .

If there is still some coolant in the expansion tank, top up to the upper mark.

Top up with coolant until the level becomes stable.

Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe- cialised workshop to have the cooling system examined.

WARNING The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of burns! Store the antifreeze in its original con- tainer and keep it out of reach of children. If working inside the engine compart- ment, remember that, even when the igni- tion is switched off, the radiator fan may start up automatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury.

283

Practical tips

CAUTION If you run out of coolant in the expansion tank, park the car in a safe place and do not continue driving. Obtain technical as- sistance.

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 198 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- gine compartment page 278.

Checking the brake fluid level The brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning light on the instrument panel display monitors the brake fluid level page 86.

Changing brake fluid We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita- ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys- tem may fail or braking power may be re- duced. Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly! When the brake fluid is used and brakes are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys- tem. These bubbles can significantly re- duce braking power, notably increasing braking distance, and could result in the to- tal failure of the brake system. Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the VW 501 14 standard. You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Service. If none is available, use only high- quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925

CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4. The replacement brake fluid must be new. Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTION Brake fluid should not come into contact with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environment Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

284

Checking and refilling levels

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the window washer tank and refilling it

Fig. 199 In the engine compartment: blue cap of the windscreen washer tank.

The window washer tank is in the engine compartment page 278.

Check the water level in the windscreen washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- quired.

The window washer tank contains liquid de- tergent for the windscreen and rear window.

Open the bonnet page 276. The window washer tank is marked with the symbol on the cap. Check there is enough windscreen water in the reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- screen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers For the hottest seasons we recommend summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- ter). All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. Approximate proportion of the winter mixture, up to -18C (0F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of mixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank can be found in page 316.

CAUTION If the water from the windscreen washer does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze on the windscreen and rear window, reducing forward and rear visibility. In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough anti-freeze. In cold conditions, you should not use the windscreen wiper system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the ventila- tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.

CAUTION Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other similar additives with the windscreen wash- er water. A greasy layer may be formed on the windscreen which will impair visibility. Use clean water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT. If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION Do not mix cleaning products recommen- ded by SEAT with other products. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen washer jets. When topping up service fluids, make ab- solutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu- ids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage! Lack of window washer fluid causes the view through the windscreen to be ob- scured.

12-volt battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine compart- ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is

285

Practical tips

checked as part of the Inspection Service. Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean and have the correct tightening torque, espe- cially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official Service or a workshop specialising in batter- ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- erwise explosive gas is released from the bat- tery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well- ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Always follow the instruction manual.

Disconnecting the battery The battery should only be disconnected in exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- connected, some of the vehicle's functions

are lost. These functions will require resetting after the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from the ve- hicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm before you disconnect the battery. Otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

Winter conditions During the winter, the starting power may be reduced, and if necessary, the battery should be charged

WARNING Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the bat- tery and the electrical system: Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead. Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents. Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu- tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury. A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- leased when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well- ventilated room only. Keep children away from acid and bat- teries. Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all electrical devices. The negative ca- ble on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need on- ly switch off the light. Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un- locking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered. When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable. Switch off all electrical devices before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.

286

Checking and refilling levels

Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in ex- plosions and chemical burns. Always re- place a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0C (+32F). Ensure that the vent hose is always con- nected to the battery. Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

CAUTION Do not expose the battery to direct sun- light over a long period of time, as the in- tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing. If the vehicle is left standing in cold con- ditions for a long period, protect the bat- tery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer charging the bat- tery. You should immediately drive to the nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary because this will drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

Fig. 200 Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt battery (schematic representation).

The electrolyte level should be checked reg- ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- tries and in older batteries.

Open the bonnet and then lift the cover that protects the front part of the battery in Working in the engine compart- ment on page 276.

Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the battery. If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compartment diagram page 278.

The magic eye indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.

There are two different colours: The battery's electrolyte

level is too low. Go to a specialised work- shop to have the battery checked and replaced if necessary.

The batterys electrolyte level is cor- rect.

Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve- hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery should be checked by a specialised work- shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- ommend you have the vehicle battery

Yellow or colourless:

Black:

287

Practical tips

checked by a Technical Service where it will be re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled environ- ment.

Replacing a vehicle battery The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features. If the battery must be re- placed, consult a technical service for infor- mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the size and maintenance, performance and safety requirements of the new battery in your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT recommends you have the battery replaced by a technical service.

Start-Stop systems ( page 194) are equip- ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must only be replaced with a battery of the same specifications.

WARNING Always use only maintenance free bat- teries that do not run flat alone and whose properties, specifications and size corre- spond to the standard battery. The specifi- cations are indicated on the battery case.

Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in General information on page 286.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the obstacle.

Check from time to time if the tyres are damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or dents). Remove any foreign objects em- bedded in the treads.

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- placed immediately.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Replace any missing valve caps as soon as possible.

Mark the wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back.

When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.

288

Wheels

Low profile tyres Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ly than standard tyres, for instance due to strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important page 291.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive with special care when driving on roads in poor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im- pact or have been damaged, have a special- ised workshop check whether or not it is nec- essary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damage Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed immediately if there is any reason to suspect that damage may have occurred. In- spect the tyres for damage. If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre Do not remove foreign bodies if they have penetrated through the tyre wall! If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility system, where necessary seal the damaged tyre as shown in section page 40. Use a specialised workshop for repair or replace- ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread wraps around the foreign body and provision- ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread pattern An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ways note the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This makes sure that optimal use is made of tyre properties in terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise and wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessories If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or wheel trims, we recommend that you consult with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice regarding current techniques.

Speed symbols The speed rating indicates the maximum speed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph) max. 160 km/h (99 mph) max. 170 km/h (106 mph) max. 180 km/h (112 mph) max. 190 km/h (118 mph) max. 200 km/h (124 mph) max. 210 km/h (130 mph) max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters ZR for tyres with a maximum authorised speed above 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents. Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident. If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres. Never use old tyres or those with an un- known history of use.

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced by a specialised workshop. There they have

P Q R S T U H V

289

Practical tips

the required knowledge, the special tools and the corresponding spare parts.

Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you have installed new tyres, drive the first 500 km carefully and at a moderate speed. All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and, if possible, tread pattern. When changing tyres, do not change just one; change at least two on the same axle. If you want to equip your vehicle with a combination tyres and rims that are different to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe- cialised workshop before purchasing them The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC document1)). The vehicle documen- tation varies depending on the country of res- idence.

If the type of spare wheel is different form the normal wheels e.g. in the case of winter tyres or particularly wide tyres the spare wheel should only be used temporarily in the event of a puncture, and the vehicle should be driven with care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.

Manufacturing date The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the wheel):

DOT ... 2218 ... it means, for example, that the tyre was man- ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING Use only combinations of tyres and rims, as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam- aged, causing an accident. For technical reasons it is not possible to use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases not even wheels from the same vehicle model should be used. Always ensure that the tyres you have chosen have adequate clearance. When selecting replacement tyres, do not rely entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif- fer significantly depending on the manu- facturer. Lack of clearance can damage the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en- danger road safety. Risk of accident! Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in an emergency, and drive with due care. The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper- ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-

hibited use can cause accidents or can damage your vehicle. If decorative hubcaps are subsequently fitted, make sure that they allow enough air in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci- dent!

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.

Note A SEAT Service Centre should be consul- ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of different sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about the combinations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). Never mount used tyres if you are not sure of their previous history.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 290

Wheels

Tyre life

Fig. 201 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- ing habits will increase the useful life of your tyres.

Check tyre pressure at least once a month, and also prior to any long trip. The tyre pressure should only be checked when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the pressure of warm tyres. Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- ried by the vehicle Fig. 201. In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, save the modified tyre pressure page 295.

Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from time to time.

Tyre pressure The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a sticker on the rear of the front left door frame Fig. 201.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- rect inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- ing comfort (tyre pressure Fig. 201). When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehicle is going to carry the maximum load, the tyre pressure should be increased to the maximum value indicated on the sticker Fig. 201.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checking the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in- flated to the highest pressure required for the road wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary spare wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18), inflate to a

pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure label Fig. 201.

Driving style Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre wear.

Wheel balance The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted or if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of- ficial Service.

WARNING Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los- ses, to tread separation or even to a blow- out.

291

Practical tips

The driver is responsible for ensuring that all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla- ted to the right pressure. The recommen- ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label Fig. 201. Check tyre pressures regularly and en- sure they are maintained at the pressures indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause overheating, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres. When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure should be that indicated on the label Fig. 201. Regularly check the cold inflation pres- sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are cold. Regularly check your tyres for damage and wear. Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 202 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 203 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be found on the base of the original tyre treads, ordered at regular intervals and running across the tread Fig. 202. The letters "TWI"

or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark the position of the wear indicators.

The minimum permitted profile depth1) have been reached when the tyres have worn down to the wear indicators. Replace the tyres with new ones .

Changing wheels around To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres the wheels should be changed round from time to time according to the system Fig. 203. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

WARNING The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident. Particularly in difficult driving conditions such as wet or icy roads. It is important that the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be approximately the same on the tyres of both the front and the rear axles. The scant driving safety due to insuffi- cient tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle handling, when there is a risk of aquaplaning in deep puddles of water

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

292

Wheels

and when driving through corners, and braking is also adversely affected. The speed has to be adapted according- ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control over the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts are matched to the rims. When installing different wheels (for instance alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use the correct wheel nuts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- curely and that the brake system functions correctly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.

A special adapter is required to remove the anti-theft wheel bolts page 44.

WARNING Wheel nuts should never be greased or oiled. Use only wheel nuts which belong to the wheel. If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve- hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTION See page 46to find out the recommen- ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for steel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Only use winter tyres that are approved for your vehicle.

Please note that the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres.

Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef- fective when the tread is worn down.

After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. When doing so, take into account the correct tyre pressures listed on the rear of the front left door frame page 291.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con- siderably improve vehicle handling. The de- sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-

pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles equipped with wide section tyres or with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on the sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)). The vehicle documentation varies depending on the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- ties when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se- verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is still much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit is stamped on all winter tyres page 289.

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds must have an appropriate sticker attached so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick- ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv- ice and specialised workshop. Please note the regulations to this effect in your country.

Using winter tyres with V-rating Please note that the generally applicable 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 293

Practical tips

with the letter V is subject to technical re- strictions; the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle may be significantly lower. The maximum speed limit for these tyres de- pends directly on the maximum axle weights for your car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to check the maximum speed which is permissi- ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis of this information.

WARNING Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con- trol of the vehicle risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment When winter is over, change back to sum- mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In temperatures above +7C (+45F), perform- ance will be improved if summer tyres are used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises while driving will all be reduced.

Note All-weather tyres can also be used instead of winter tyres. Please note that only winter tyres with the symbol may be fitted in some countries where winter tyres are mandatory.

Snow chains

Snow chains should only be used on the front wheels.

Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufac- turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). If there is a danger of being trapped de- spite having mounted the chains, it is best to disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC page 239, Connecting and disconnect- ing the ESC and ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only be used with the following wheel rim/tyre combination.

Tyres Wheel rim Chains

195/60 R16 6Jx16 ET45 Max. link 13.5 mm

205/60 R16 6Jx16 ET45

Max. link 9 mm205/55 R17 6.5Jx17 ET48

215/45 R18 7Jx18 ET47

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims and the rim ring before fitting snow chains.

WARNING The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted chains could lead to serious accidents and damage. Always the appropriate snow chains. Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer. Never exceed the maximum permitted speeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will im- pair vehicle handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly. Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch- ed if the chains come into direct contact with them. SEAT recommends the use of covered snow chains.

294

Wheels

Tyre pressure monitor sys- tem

Control lamp

It lights up

The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the value set by the driver in Tyre pressure moni- tor indicator on page 295.

Or: Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.

Several control and warning lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on while the function is verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 87.

Tyre pressure monitor indicator

The tyre pressure monitor indicator compares wheel revolutions and, with this information, the tread of each wheel using the ABS sen- sors.

The tyre pressure monitor indicator warns of any change in the tread diameter of a wheel .

Wheel tread change The wheel diameter changes when:

Tyre pressure is changed manually. Tyre pressure is insufficient. The tyre structure is damaged. The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load. The wheels on an axle are subject to a heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. The temporary spare wheel is fitted. The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre pressure monitoring indicator or it may not indicate anything under certain circum- stances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or unpaved roads, or when driving with snow chains).

Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in- dicator After changing the tyre pressure or replacing one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni- toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for example, when the front and rear wheels are swapped.

Switch the ignition on. Save the new inflation pressure in the info- tainment system using the button > Ve-

hicle status > Tyres; OR: > Exteri- or settings > Tyres page 92 .

When driving, the system self-calibrates the tyre pressure provided by the driver and the wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied speeds the programmed values are collected and monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, the tyre pressure must be increased to the total recommended tyre pressure before calibra- tion Fig. 201.

WARNING When the tyres are inflated at different pressures or at a pressure that is too low then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal accident. If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im- mediately and avoid any sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status. The tyre monitoring system can only op- erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla- ted to the correct pressure when cold. If a tyre has not been punctured and it does not have to be changed immediately, drive to the nearest specialised workshop at a moderate speed and have the tyre checked and inflated to the correct pres- sure.

295

Practical tips

Note Driving for the first time with new tyres at a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- pand, which could then produce an air pressure warning. Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring system. Regularly check your tyres to en- sure that the tyre pressure is correct and that the tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects from the tyres only when they have not pierced the tyres. The tyre pressure monitoring indicator does not function when there is a fault in the ESC or ABS page 237. If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp lights up after turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.

Spare wheel

Location and use of the temporary spare wheel

Fig. 204 In the luggage compartment: remove the subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

The temporary spare wheel has been de- signed to be used for short periods of time. Have the tyres checked and replaced as soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or at a specialised workshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for a spare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the temporary spare wheel page 130. Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise. Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles with BEATS Audio 6 speakers (with sub- woofer) To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- move the subwoofer.

Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug- gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug- gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it out. Vehicles with a variable luggage compart- ment floor: lift and secure the floor luggage compartment as explained in page 130. Disconnect the subwoofer Fig. 204 1 speaker cable. Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- wise direction Fig. 204 2 . Remove the subwoofer speaker and the spare wheel. When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with care. When doing so, the tip of the FRONT arrow on the subwoofer should point forward. Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the

296

Wheels

subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place.

Removing the 16 temporary spare wheel (without subwoofer) Remove the luggage compartment varia- ble floor to access the wheel and the tools page 130. Loosen the strap that secures the box by pressing on the buckle. Remove the toolbox. Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise and remove it. Press the thread and turn it 90 clockwise or anti-clockwise and remove it. Pull on the front part of the spare wheel to remove it.

Chains For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-

ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci- dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left front door frame Fig. 201. Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident! Never travel more than 200 km using a temporary spare wheel. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident! Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci- dent. No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off.

297

Maintenance

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro- gramme

Service intervals

Service work and the Digital Main- tenance Plan

Log of services performed (Digital Main- tenance Plan) The SEAT dealership or a specialised work- shop records Service receipts in a central system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu- mentation of the service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service receipt after every service carried out con- taining all the services carried out on the sys- tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- able in some markets. In this case, your SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- rent documentation of the work.

Service works In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop documents the following information:

When each one of the services was carried out. Whether a specific repair has been sugges- ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. If you have expressed a special request for the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will write the work order. The components or fluids that were changed. The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until the next inspection. This information is docu- mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may vary from one vehicle to another. A special- ised workshop will be able to provide specific information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic cause an accident and severe in- juries.

Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a SEAT authorised service or speci- alised workshop.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Note Regular services on the vehicle not only maintain its value, but also its correct oper- ation and road safety. For this reason, con- duct the services in accordance with SEAT guidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service In- tervals

Services are classified as oil change service and inspection. The service interval display on the instrument panel display serves as a reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and the conditions of use of the car, either the Fixed service or the Flexible service will be applied for an oil change service..

298

SEAT Maintenance Programme

How to know which type of service needs to his vehicle Check the tables below:

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type of service Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after 1 yearb)

QI3 Every 10000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI4 Every 15000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI6 Flexible According to the service in- terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible Service Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil change service only has to be performed when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take into account the individual conditions of use and personal driving style. A major component of the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci- fications of the engine oil according to the VW standard page 279.

If you do not want to the flexible service you can select the fixed service However, a fixed service may affect service costs The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval display At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- ted by the service intervals display: on the instrument panel page 82 in the infotainment system: menu > Set- tings > Service; OR > Vehicle status > Service page 88.

The service interval display gives information for service dates that involve an engine oil change or an inspection. When the time for the corresponding service comes, additional work required, such as the change of brake fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usually based on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- verse conditions of use, some of the work must be carried out before the next service period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Frequent short trips. Letting the engine idle for a long period of time, as in the case of taxis. Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on equipment). Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following parts (depending on equipment):

Dust and pollen filter Air Care allergen filter Air filter Toothed chain Particulate filter Engine oil

299

Maintenance

The Service Advisor of your specialised workshop will gladly inform you about the need of performing service work between normal service intervals, always considering the conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Have the services conducted at author- ised SEAT services or specialised work- shops.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maintenance works needed to ensure the safety and the smooth running of the vehicle (depending on the conditions of use and the features of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or operating fluids). Maintenance services are divided into inspection and review services. Consult the details of the jobs required for your vehicle at:

Your SEAT authorised service Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- opment of components) the sets of services may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop is always receiving up- dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT S.A., with a special emphasis on safety. These parts correspond exactly to the manu- facturer's requirements in terms of design, accuracy of the measurements and materi- als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this reason, we always recommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT S.A. cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu- facturer's requirements, are an additional service to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine, gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the same as the factory parts, which are also ap- proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original Accessories and SEAT approved accessories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and suitability of these accessories have been in- spected specifically for this type of vehicle. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase, your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov- ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad- ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri- od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as you carry out the recommended Inspection

300

Vehicle maintenance

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- ised Service.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Service differs depending on the country in which the vehicle was purchased. For further information ask your SEAT dealership or the SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect condition of new vehicles. Check the pur- chase agreement or complementary addi- tional documentation provided by your Tech- nical Service to see the conditions and the terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- mation in this regard in your SEAT Official Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may become a prerequisite to demand the war- ranty in the event of corrosion damage and deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions for application on the packaging.

WARNING Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your health if misused. Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment When purchasing car care products, chose products that are compatible with the environment. The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the more damage it can cause to the surface. High temperatures, for instance strong sun- light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af- ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipment When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- structions for the equipment. This applies particularly to the operating pressure and the distance between the spraying water. Do not aim the jet directly to the side window gas- kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sunroof; the same applies to tyres, rubber hoses, soundproofing material, sensors or camera lenses. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high- pressure cleaner.

301

Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed 60C.

Automatic car washes Spray the vehicle before starting the car wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor- amic sunroof are closed and the windscreen wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- structions of the car wash tunnel operator, especially if your vehicle has detachable parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by hand To prevent damage to the vehicle when washing it, first remove the thicker dust and dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of water with a leather cloth.

WARNING Only wash the vehicle with the ignition switched off or according to the specifica- tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk of accident! When cleaning the underbody or the in- side of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of cut! After cleaning the brakes could act more slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- dent! In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

CAUTION Before washing the vehicle in an auto- matic car wash, please make sure to re- tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. The electric folding

exterior mirrors should only be folded elec- tronically! Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job! Do not use sponges, abrasive household sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Risk of damaging the surface! Vehicle parts with matte paint: Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface! Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam- age the appearance of matte paint.

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts with matte paint, as removing them may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment The car should only be washed in special wash bays. These places are prepared to prevent oily water from getting into the public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc- tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual components of the vehicle can be checked in the following tables. The contents should be understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have

302

Vehicle maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed. Take he general considerations into account in Take special care with... on page 306.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol- vent-free cleaning product Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning prod- uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spray with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasion dust

Acid-free special cleaning product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steel cleaning product is re- quired

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flaws Check the paint's colour code in an authorised service and re- store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust tank

Apply rust remover and then apply hard wax. Go you your specialised workshop if you have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work- shop take care of this

The water does not create drop- lets on the clean paint

Maintain with hard wax (at least 2 times a year)

No shine de- spite sober main- tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap- ply paint preservative after- wards if the wax used does not contain preservative ingredi- ents

Tanks, e.g. insect remains, bird droppings, tree sap, road salt

Immediately soften with water and remove with a microfibre cloth

Fat-based dirt, e.g. cosmetic products or sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu- tral soap solutiona) and a soft cloth

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain- ted parts page 301

303

Maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- sible solvent-free plastic clean- er

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al- lowed to dry before retracting

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirt stuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral soap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make- up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona). Absorb the dissolved grease and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you must treat it with water after- wards

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry with an absorbent cloth, if applica- ble, apply neutral soap solution afterwardsa)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solutiona)

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth Dry stains: stain remover suita- ble for leather

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make- up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth and suitable stain remover for leather Dry stains: grease solvent spray

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable for leather

304

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu- larly to protect from sunlight. Use a colour preservative if re- quired

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge. Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive products. If the protective coating on the paint of the rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, scratches, etc., the damage should be re- paired immediately.

Camera lenses Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of cracking the lens! To clean the camera lens, never use abra- sive cleaning products or products with alco- hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows Remove snow and ice from windows and exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To avoid scratches, the scraper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to and fro. Never remove snow or ice from windows and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. Risk of cracks on the windows! To prevent damage to the heating of the rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements.

Covers/trims Do not use cleaning products or chrome based cleaning agents.

Paint The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust before applying wax or care products. Risk of scratches! Do not apply wax or care products if the vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job!

The ambient rust deposits must not be re- moved through friction. Risk of damaging the paint job! Remove cosmetic products and sunlight immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel The screens, the instrument panel and the trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of scratches! Make sure that the instrument panel is switched off and cooled down before clean- ing. Make sure that no liquid leaks between the instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- age!

Control panels Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Seat belts and their components must nev- er be cleaned with chemical products, nor should they be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- jects. Risk of damaging the fabric! If you find any damage to the belt webbing, belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, ask your specialised workshop to replace the belt in question.

305

Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- er Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara leather with leather cleaning products, sol- vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar products. If the stain is very hard to remove, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it removed there. This will prevent damage. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating to dry the seats. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ets or belts can damage the surface. Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed.

Natural leather Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on leather. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ets or belts can damage the surface. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating to dry the seats. Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to cover the leather.

WARNING Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such as humid weather, darkness or when the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat- ings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make noise.

Note Remains of insects can be removed much more easily with previously treated paint. Regular car care treatments can prevent deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary for a long period of time, contact a qualified workshop. They will gladly inform you about the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding the vehicle's battery page 285.

Accessories and modifi- cations to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts and repair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for advice before purchasing accessories and replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand- ard of active and passive safety. For this rea- son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi- cial Service for advice before fitting accesso- ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official Service has the latest information from the manufacturer and can recommend accesso- ries and replacement parts which are suita- ble for your requirements. They can also an- swer any questions you might have regarding official regulations.

We recommend only using SEAT accesso- ries and genuine SEAT parts. SEAT has tested these parts and accessories for suita- bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that the parts are installed correctly and professionally.

306

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven, such as a cruise control system or electronically-controlled suspension, must be approved for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit- ted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in the European Union).

WARNING Accessories, for example telephone hold- ers or cup holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or within the working range of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components, software, wiring or data transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work per- formed incorrectly.

For this reason we recommend asking official SEAT service centres to do any necessary work using genuine SEAT parts.

WARNING Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip- ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation) Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT generally authorises in-vehicle installations of approved types of radio transmitters provi- ded that:

The antenna is installed correctly. The aerial is installed on the exterior of the vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). The effective transmitting power does not exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- shop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters Commercial mobile telephones or radio equipment might interfere with the electron- ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to:

No external aerial. External aerial incorrectly installed. Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed exter- nal aerial .

Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.

Business equipment Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- ded the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's immediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the mark. Any retrofit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type approval for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.

WARNING Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without

307

Maintenance

a properly installed external aerial can create excessive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.

Note The posterior fitting of electric and elec- tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its licence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances. Please use the mobile telephone/radio operating instructions.

308

Information for the user

Information for the user

Information for the user

Information stored by the control units

Storage of accident data (Event Data Recorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR).

The EDRs function is to record data in the event of a mild or serious accident. These da- ta are used to support the analysis of how dif- ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- ing data and data from the restraint systems, such as:

How different vehicle systems worked. Whether the driver and the occupants were wearing their seat belts. How hard the acceleration or brake pedal was pressed. Vehicle speed. GPS position.

These data will provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also recorded. This includes data such as whether the systems were inactive or active and if such action had an impact on the vehicles dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the aforementioned situations, accelerating or decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- cludes data from systems such as:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist). Park Pilot system

The EDR data are only recorded in specific accident situations. No data are recorded in normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- ces are personal data such as name, age, or gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate the contents of the EDR data to other data sources and create a personal reference in the context of an accident inves- tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary to access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (On-Board-Diagnose) inter- face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless the owner (or, in Leasing cases, the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex- ceptions to this, depending on legal or con- tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle system quality. Any data used for the purpo- ses of research will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufac- ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re- cycling Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling. Modular construction to facilitate disman- tling. Increased use of single-grade materials.

309

Information for the user

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.

Choice of materials Use of recycled materials. Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated. Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources. Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials. Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities. Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- cle transport. Use of solvent-free adhesives. Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- tems. Recycling and energy recovery from resi- dues (RDF). Improvement in the quality of waste water.

Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.). The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electron- ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must be marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not be discarded as home waste but through selec- tive waste collection.

Radioelectrical equipment

Simplified declaration of conformi- ty

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with Directive 2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

United Kingdom Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with the UK Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 (SI 2017/1206) if required by law.

The full text of the declaration of conformity is available online at the following Internet ad- dress:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Ukraine Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with Ukraine Decree 355/2017 (TR Radio Equipment) where legal- ly required.

The full text of the declaration of conformity is available online at the following Internet ad- dress:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Addresses of the manufacturers

The address of the manufacturers of compo- nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot

310

Information for the user

include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is legally required:

Central control unit (BCM) Robert Bosch GmbH/Braunschweig Theodor-Heuss-Strasse 12 38122 - Braunschweig, Germany Phone: 0049 53188890

Keyless Access system HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA/Hamm Roemerstr. 66 59075 - Hamm, Germany Phone: 0049 23817980

Roof antenna ASK Industries S.p.A Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16 60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy Phone: +3907174521 Website: www.askgroup.it

Mitsumi Electronics Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 32 63225 Langen, Germany Phone: +49 (0) 6103913-0 Website: www.minebeamitsumi.co.jp

Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH Daimlerring 31 31135 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +49 3377 3160 Website: www.molex.com

Antenna amplifiers ASK Industries S.p.A Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16 60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy Phone: +3907174521 Website: www.askgroup.it

Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany Phone: +49 7127 140 Website: www.te.com

KATHREIN Automotive GmbH Rmerring 1 31137 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +498031184-0 Website: www.kathrein.com

Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH Daimlerring 31 31135 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +49 3377 3160 Website: www.molex.com

Navigation antenna Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany Phone: +49 7127 140 Website: www.te.com

KATHREIN Automotive GmbH Rmerring 1 31137 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +498031184-0 Website: www.kathrein.com

Connectivity Box Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH Mrkische Strasse 72 15806 Zossen OT Dabendorf, Germany Phone:+49 3377 3160 Website: www.molex.com

Basic infotainment system Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech U Panasonicu 266 530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic

Optional infotainment system LG Electronics Mlawa SP LG Electronics 7 06 500, Mlawa

Remote control key Digades GmbH Digitales Und Ana/Zittau uere Weberstr. 20 02763 - Zittau, Germany Phone: 0049 358357750

311

Information for the user

Instrument panel Analogue SE38x/SE316 Visteon Electronics Germany GmbH Visteonstr. 4-10 50170 Kerpen, Germany

Analogue all other models Continental Automotive Spain, S.A. Crta. de Rub a Ullastrell, n 12-30 08191 Rub (Barcelona - Spain)

FPK (digital) Continental Automotive GmbH VDO-Strasse 1, 64832 Babenhausen, Germany

Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH Robert Bosch Str. 27-29 63225 Langen, Germany

Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech, s.r.o. U Panasonicu 266 530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic

Front radar sensors MRR for SE38X Robert Bosch GmbH Markwiesenstrasse, 46 72770 Reutlingen (Kusterdingen) Germany

MRR for Tarraco, Ateca, Ibiza, Arona Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH Peter-Dornier-Strasse, 10 88131, Lindau, Germany

Rear radar sensors Hella GmbH & Co. KGaA Rixbecker Strae 75 59552 Lippstadt (Germany)

Online Connectivity Unit LG ELECTRONICS INC. 10, Magokjungang 10-ro, Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Republic of Korea

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models 433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 W

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW Alhambra 312

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating) 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Bluetooth 2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Leon, Alhambra and TarracoGSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm

Tarraco and Leon

WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for front assist systems 76 GHz-77 GHz 28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for rear assist systems 24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 5 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

313

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBA/m Ibiza, Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Online Connectivity Unit

EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm

UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 24 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748 MHz 23.0 dBm

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

Additional information for coun- tries outside the European Union

Mexico Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with Directive RLVCOAR15-0008 when legally required. The full text of the declaration of conformity is

available online at the following Internet ad- dress:

https://www.seat.mx/servicio/mi-seat/manual- del-propietario.html

Certificate: RLVHERS17-0286. RS4 Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. short-range radar IFT:RLVHERS17-0286. The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must accept any inter- ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

United Kingdom This vehicle has various radio equipment de- vices installed.

314

Information for the user

The following acts as importer of the radio equipment devices for the United Kingdom market within the meaning of The Radio Equipment Regulations 2017:

Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd. Yeomans Drive, Blakelands Milton Keynes, MK 14 5AN United Kingdom

Trkiye Telsiz Ekipmanlar Ynetmelii (2014/53/AB)

Aracnzda eitli telsiz ekipmanlar bulun- maktadr.

Telsiz Ekipmanlari Ynetmelii (2014/53/AB) asndan Trkiye pazar iin radyo ekipman ithalats (bu bilgi sadece resmi temsilcimiz olan Dou Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A..nin ithal ettii rnler iin geerlidir):

Dou Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A.. ekerpnar Mahallesi, Anadolu Caddesi, No: 22 ve 45 41420 ayrova/Kocaeli

Ukraine : . , 1, , 4- 02152 , .

Importer: Porsche Ukraine LLC Pavla Tychyny ave. 1V, Office B, 4th floor 02152 Kyiv, Ukraine.

315

Technical data

Technical data

Indications about the technical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical data may differ depending on optional equipment or version of the model, as well as in the case of special vehicles and equipment for certain countries.

The information in the official vehicle docu- mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die- sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle ID number The vehicle ID number can be found in the following places:

One the vehicle's data label. In front, under the windscreen. To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plate The type plate is located on the vehicles right hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised by certified EU laboratories, according to the legislation in force at the time (for more infor- mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: Eu- ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- pend on the equipment/features of each indi-

vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environ- mental conditions, load or number of passen- gers.

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol engines 40 l, 7 l reserve

Natural gas en- ginea)

approx. 13.8 kg Additional petrol tank: 9 l, of

which approx 7.6 l is a reserve

a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac- teristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indi- cated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200 bar.

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- tainer

Windscreen washer fluid container approx. 3 litres

Weights

Load on the roof The maximum authorised roof load for your vehicle is 75 kg.

316

Indications about the technical data

Empty weight, total weight, axle loads The empty weight of the vehicle with driver (75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU) 1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can increase the empty weight, which means that the possible useful load decreases propor- tionally.

Trailer weight The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball head of the towing bracket is 55 kg.

WARNING The values indicated for the maximum per- mitted weights must not be exceeded. There is a risk of accident and damage!

317

Technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 1.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 81 (110)/5,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/1,600-3,500 200/2,000-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 3/999

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 182 (V) 190 (V) 190 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.4 10.3 10.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700a) 1,720a) 1,740a)

a) Varies depending on the features.

Petrol engines 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 1.6 MPI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 152/3,800-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498 4/1,598

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox DSG manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 210 (V) 181 (IV) 181 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.4 11 11.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,760a) 1,680a) 1,720a)

a) Varies depending on the features.

318

Indications about the technical data

Natural gas / petrol engine 1.0 TGI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 66 (90)/4,000-5,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1,800-3,800

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999

Fuel CNG

Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual (VI)

Top speed (km/h) 178 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1710

319

Technical data

Dimensions.

Fig. 205 Dimensions and angles.

320

Indications about the technical data

Fig. 205 ARONA

A Front projection (mm) 809

B Rear projection (mm) 779

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566

D Length (mm) 4,154

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,513

F Backa) track (mm) 1,495

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,537b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 173

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 18.1

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 28.1

Turning radius (m) 10.6

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. b) Dimension to the roof bars.

321

Index

Index Numbers and Symbols 12-volt battery

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 285 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

A ABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 306 Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Adjust front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Air conditioning Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Android Auto

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 260 Anti-trap function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Apple CarPlay

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Aspects to think about before starting the ve-

hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Assistance systems

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 240 cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 216 front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 229 parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 229, 232 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 75 safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

323

Index

Audible warning control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 112 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 emergency release of the selector lever. . . 202 ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 199 tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 199 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

B Background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Backrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Bicycle carrier

installing on the tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Blown bulbs change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 278 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

C Camera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Capacities

natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Care see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 tail light bulb in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 tail light bulb in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Check lists

requirements for Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 requirements for MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Childproof locks electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Child seats group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34, 35

Cleaning the vehicle high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . 301 special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Clocks

set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

324

Index

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 239 audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 239 fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 230 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 219

rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 270 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Controls and displays overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Cruise control system

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . . 143

D Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . . 159 Deactivation of cylinders

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 69 Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Display of road signs on the instrument panel activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Disposal seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Distance control see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 208 with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 263, 267

Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

325

Index

Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

E e-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Eco-driving notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Electrical accessories

see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 193 Electronic parking brake

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 first aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 210 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Emergency opening

driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Emergency operation front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Emissions control system catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Engine assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Engine and ignition automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 190 emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 191 switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 278 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 283 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Engine failure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Engine oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 282 checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

326

Index

maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Engine oil pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Enlarge

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Environmental tip refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 306 telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

ESC electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 237 multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 fold manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8 External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 external audio sources

adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

F Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Filling capacities

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 First aid kit

housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 115 Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Front Assist

see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 216 Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Fuel

ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Fuel consumption inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 275

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Fuel tank cap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Fuel tank flap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56, 57 preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

G Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Gear change

engage the gears (manual change) . . . . . . . 196 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 18 Head-protection airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

327

Index

Headlights change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 126 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

I Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Identity accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 143

adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 before first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 executing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148 Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Infotainment system see Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 298 Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 71 use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 84

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

K Keyless Access

Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 99

Keyless Access lock and ignition system: see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Keyless Entry see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Keyless Exit see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Keys assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 106 vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

328

Index

L Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Lane assist Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Leaving a parking space with the parking as-

sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . . 115 headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . . 62 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Loading the luggage compartment fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 128 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Lock and unlock in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 128 emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . 130

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

M Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 240 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 MirrorLink

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

329

Index

Mirrors adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 188

favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 use streaming services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

N Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 274 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 detailed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 enter an address for a guide destination . . . 179 favourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 frequent destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

managing the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 180 navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 182 saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 use the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 use the map to enter the destination . . . . . . 180

Noise brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 293

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

O Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 271 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 271 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Operating fault automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Operation in winter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

P Painting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Park Assist

see the assisted parking system (Park As- sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 with the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Parking aid

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 253

330

Index

parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 see the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 253 surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 253

Parking aid system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 249, 252

Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 246 leaving a parking space (only when paral-

lel parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Parking distance warning system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 249, 252

Parking (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 249, 252 Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15 Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Power sockets

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Power steering

see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . 203 Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Preheating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

R Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Radio-operated remote control see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 229

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . 229, 232 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Rear fog light control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Rear mounting

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Rear seat

folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . 127 Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 gas tank indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68, 79 Road signs

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

331

Index

Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

S S-PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Save fuel inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 adjusting de seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 22 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Seats

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Service

Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Service Menu

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 199 Side airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

332

Index

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Special characteristics

Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53 tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Speed limiter indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 194 the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 active cylinder management status (ACT) . 69 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Eco-driving notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 197 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 73

Steering control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Steering wheel

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 199

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 storage bag in the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Storage compartment accessories see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Storing objects

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 133 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Switching off

telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

T Tail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Tail lights on the bodywork

remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Tail lights on the rear lid

remove the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

333

Index

vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Telephone

contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Temperature indicator exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Time adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 79

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 197, 199 To change the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 To park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34, 35 Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34, 35 Torque

wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148 Touch zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Towable loads

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 259 Tow hook

fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 place in the reserve position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 safety check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 operation and conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Towing device fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53 front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53 rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53 tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Traffic programme

see TP (traffic information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 263

adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 260 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 267 exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 259 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 253 power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 259 technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 259 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 256, 260

Trailer mode see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Travel Assist

see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Trips abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Tyre pressure loss indicator

Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

334

Index

Tyres accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

U Unlock and lock

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . 130 Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 99 vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Vehicle battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Vehicle care wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Siri (Apple CarPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Volume set for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

W Warning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 117 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . . 301 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . 301 sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 293 anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Wheels change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 46 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Wheel trim

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Window washer window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

335

Index

rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Winter conditions trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Wiper and rear window wiper blades

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Wiper blades cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

X XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

336

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.21

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Arona Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Arona 2021 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Arona as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Arona. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Arona 2021 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Arona 2021 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Arona 2021 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Arona 2021 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Arona 2021 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.